GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 15i/150i-Model A
Programming Manual
(Macro Compiler/Macro Executor)
GFZ-63323EN-2/01 November 2000
 GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication

Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.

Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.

©Copyright 2002 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warnings and Cautions according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as Notes. Read the Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there
is a danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being
damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the
approved procedure is not observed.

NOTE
Notes are used to indicate supplementary information other than
Warnings and Cautions.

* Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

B-63323EN-2/01 CONTENTS

CONTENTS

1 GENERAL ................................................................
................................................................................................
.........................................................................................
......................................................... 1

2 MACRO COMPILER AND MACRO EXECUTOR ............................................................

............................................................ 3

2.1 Macro Compiler

Compiler................................
................................................................
................................................................................................
.........................................................................................
......................................................... 4
2.1.1 P-CODE macro and P-CODE file...................................................................................... 4
2.2 Macro Executor ................................................................
................................................................................................
.........................................................................................
......................................................... 7
2.3 P-CODE Macro
Macro................................
................................................................
................................................................................................
..........................................................................................
.......................................................... 8
2.3.1 Limitations on commands ................................................................................................. 8
2.3.2 Differences from the FS15-B........................................................................................... 10

3 EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION

FUNCTION................................
................................................................
................................................................................
................................................ 11

3.1 General................................
General ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
....................................................................
.................................... 12
3.2 Calling an Execution Macro ................................................................
................................................................................................
...................................................................
................................... 13
3.2.1 Simple call (G65).............................................................................................................. 16
3.2.2 Modal call (G66 or G66.1)................................................................................................ 17
3.2.3 Macro call using a G code................................................................................................ 17
3.2.4 Macro calls with G codes (Specification of Multiple G codes) ....................................... 18
3.2.5 Macro call using an M code ............................................................................................. 20
3.2.6 Macro call using a T code ................................................................................................ 21
3.2.7 Macro call using an axis address .................................................................................... 23
3.2.8 Subprogram call (M98) .................................................................................................... 27
3.2.9 Subprogram call using an M code................................................................................... 27
3.2.10 Subprogram call using an M code in the specified range.............................................. 28
3.2.11 Subprogram call using an S code.................................................................................... 29
3.2.12 Subprogram call using a T code ...................................................................................... 30
3.2.13 Subprogram call using a second auxiliary function code .............................................. 31
3.2.14 Subprogram call using a specific code ............................................................................ 32
3.2.15 Subprogram call for a user program............................................................................... 33
3.2.16 P-CODE workpiece number search ................................................................................ 33
3.3 Limitations on Execution Macros
Macros................................
................................................................
...........................................................................................
........................................................... 35
3.3.1 Commands that cannot be used in execution macros.................................................... 35
3.3.2 Functions which cannot use execution macros .............................................................. 35
3.3.3 Optional block skip .......................................................................................................... 35

c-1
CONTENTS B-63323EN-2/01

3.4 Differences from the FS15-B ................................................................

................................................................................................
..................................................................
.................................. 37

4 CONVERSATIONAL MAC
MACRO
RO (TALK MACRO) FUNCTION AND
AUXILIARY MACRO FUNCTION ................................................................
.................................................................................
................................................. 39

4.1 Conversational Macro (Talk Macro) Function ................................................................

.......................................................................
....................................... 40
4.1.1 Execution and termination ............................................................................................. 40
4.1.2 Commands........................................................................................................................ 43
4.2 Auxiliary Macro Function................................
Function................................................................
................................................................................................
.......................................................................
....................................... 44
4.2.1 Execution and termination ............................................................................................. 44
4.2.2 Commands........................................................................................................................ 45
4.2.3 Execution cycle................................................................................................................. 46
4.3 Execution Control Codes ................................................................
................................................................................................
........................................................................
........................................ 48
4.4 Execution Control Variables (#8500, #8510, and #8600) ......................................................
...................................................... 50
4.5 Fatal Error ................................................................
................................................................................................
..............................................................................................
.............................................................. 52

5 MACRO VARIABLES
VARIABLES................................
................................................................
................................................................................................
......................................................................
...................................... 54

5.1 Macro Variable List ................................................................

................................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................ 55
5.2 Local Va
Variables
riables (#1 to #33)/Array Variables (#1 to #99) .......................................................
....................................................... 57
5.3 Common Variables (#100 to #199, #200 to #499, and #500 to #999)................................
#999).....................................
..................................... 58
5.4 P-CODE Variables (#30000 and Above) ................................................................
.................................................................................
................................................. 60
5.5 Extended P-CODE Variables (#40000 and Above) ................................................................
................................................................ 63
5.6 Custom Macro Common Variables (#99100 to #99999) .........................................................
......................................................... 66
5.7 Custom Macro System Variables (#1000 and Above) ............................................................
............................................................ 67

6 MACRO
MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS ................................................................
...............................................................................
............................................... 70

6.1 Screen Display Functions ................................................................

................................................................................................
.......................................................................
....................................... 76
6.1.1 Screen coordinate system ................................................................................................ 76
6.1.2 Screen display control codes ........................................................................................... 79
6.1.2.1 Screen clear (G202) .......................................................................................................81

6.1.2.2 Color specification (G240) .............................................................................................82

6.1.2.3 Drawing start point setting (G242) ..............................................................................84

6.1.2.4 Character display (G243) ..............................................................................................84

6.1.2.5 Drawing line type specification (G244) ........................................................................89

6.1.2.6 Prompt statement display (G280) ................................................................................90

6.1.2.7 Linear drawing (G301) ..................................................................................................90

6.1.2.8 Circular drawing (clockwise) (G302) ............................................................................91

6.1.2.9 Circular drawing (counterclockwise) (G303)................................................................91

c-2
B-63323EN-2/01 CONTENTS

6.1.2.10 Cursor display (G230) ...................................................................................................92

6.1.2.11 Absolute mode (G390)/incremental mode (G391) specification...................................93

6.1.2.12 Graphic coordinate system setting (G392) ...................................................................93

6.1.2.13 Rapid traverse rate specification (G311)......................................................................94

6.1.2.14 Rapid traverse drawing (G300) ....................................................................................95

6.1.2.15 Closed area filling (G320) .............................................................................................96

6.1.2.16 Rectangular display (G204) ..........................................................................................97

6.1.2.17 Marking (G321) .............................................................................................................98

6.1.2.18 Shift function for graphic screen adjustment ............................................................100

6.1.2.19 Reading of the graphic state .......................................................................................100

6.1.2.20 Differences from the FS15-B.......................................................................................101

6.1.3 Character string registration program number specification (#8509) ....................... 101
6.1.4 Function screen control function (#8530) ..................................................................... 101
6.2 Key Input and Data Input/Output ................................................................
.......................................................................................
....................................................... 103
6.2.1 Command key input variable (#8501) .......................................................................... 103
6.2.2 Data input control variable (#8502).............................................................................. 105
6.2.3 Extended data input control variable #8552................................................................ 106
6.2.4 Consecutive input of cursor and page keys.................................................................. 108
6.2.5 MDI key image reading function (variables #8540 to #8549) ..................................... 108
6.3 Address Functions ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................ 112
6.3.1 PMC address reference.................................................................................................. 112
6.3.2 CNC parameter reference ............................................................................................. 113
6.4 PMC Address Reading/Writing (G310) ................................................................
................................................................................
................................................ 115
6.5 Reader/Puncher Interface ................................................................
................................................................................................
....................................................................
.................................... 118
6.5.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 118
6.5.2 Functions........................................................................................................................ 119
6.5.3 Macro variable input/output functions......................................................................... 121
6.5.4 Data transmission/reception waiting cancellation ...................................................... 126
6.5.5 FANUC cassette control ................................................................................................ 127
6.5.6 Completion codes ........................................................................................................... 133
6.6 Referencing and Writing CNC Programs ................................................................
............................................................................
............................................ 135
6.6.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 135
6.6.2 Details of control codes and control variables.............................................................. 136
6.6.3 Limitations ..................................................................................................................... 146
6.6.4 Appendix tables ............................................................................................................. 147
6.7 Cutting Time and Distance Read and Preset Functions .....................................................
..................................................... 148
6.8 Relative Coordinate Read and Preset Functions (#8996 to #8999)................................
#8999) ..........................................
.......................................... 150

c-3
CONTENTS B-63323EN-2/01

6.9 Array-Type Processing and Referencing of P-CODE Variables

Variables................................
...............................................
............................................... 152
6.10 Torque Limit Override Control (#8990 to #8993) ................................................................
................................................................ 155
6.11 Reading A/D Conversion Data................................
Data................................................................
..............................................................................................
.............................................................. 156
6.12 Reading the Distance to Go (#5181 to #5200 and #100801 to 100824) ............................... 159
6.13 PMC Axis Control ................................................................
................................................................................................
.................................................................................
................................................. 160
6.13.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 160
6.13.2 Details of control codes.................................................................................................. 161
6.13.3 Limitations ..................................................................................................................... 164
6.13.4 Cautions ......................................................................................................................... 165
6.14 File Control ................................................................
................................................................................................
...........................................................................................
........................................................... 166
6.14.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 166
6.14.2 Setup procedure ............................................................................................................. 166
6.14.3 Setting ............................................................................................................................ 168
6.14.4 Error messages .............................................................................................................. 169
6.14.5 List of commands ........................................................................................................... 169
6.14.6 Cautions ......................................................................................................................... 173
6.15 Axis-Direction-by-Axis-Direction Interlock Function (#8605 to #8608) ............................. 175
6.16 Window Function (#8996 to #8999) ................................................................
......................................................................................
...................................................... 178
6.16.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 178
6.16.2 Alarm information and external alarm information ................................................... 182
6.16.3 The number of controlled axes and the number of servo axes.................................... 204
6.16.4 Cumulative operation time and parts count ................................................................ 204
6.16.5 Diagnosis information ................................................................................................... 205
6.16.6 System, servo, and PMC series information ................................................................ 206
6.17 Function for Searching Data Tables for Control Variables................................
Variables.................................................
................................................. 208

7 DEBUGGING FUNCTION ................................................................

............................................................................................
............................................................212
............................212

7.1 General................................
General ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
..................................................................
.................................. 213
7.2 Displaying and Setting on the Debugger Screen................................
Screen ................................................................
.................................................................
................................. 214
7.3 Direct Setting by Parameter and Key ................................................................
..................................................................................
.................................................. 219

8 OPERATION ................................................................
................................................................................................
..................................................................................
..................................................221
..................221

8.1 Displaying and Setting Values in Macro Variables................................

Variables.............................................................
............................................................. 222
8.2 Displaying P-CODE Macro Program Numbers ................................................................
...................................................................
................................... 232
8.3 Displaying Execution Macro Call Information ................................................................
....................................................................
.................................... 234

9 PARAMETERS................................................................
................................................................................................
...............................................................................
...............................................237
...............237

c-4
B-63323EN-2/01 CONTENTS

9.1 Compile Parameters ................................................................

................................................................................................
.............................................................................
............................................. 238
9.2 P-CODE Macro Parameters ................................................................
................................................................................................
.................................................................
................................. 253

10 APPENDIX ................................................................
................................................................................................
.....................................................................................
.....................................................255
.....................255

10.1 Error No. List................................

List ................................................................
................................................................................................
........................................................................................
........................................................ 256
10.2 Macro Program Example (Inputting Data and Performing Circle Cutting) ...................... 261
10.2.1 Program functions ......................................................................................................... 261
10.2.2 Meanings of macro variables ........................................................................................ 262
10.2.3 Source programs ............................................................................................................ 262
10.2.4 Flowchart ....................................................................................................................... 272
10.2.5 Program explanation ..................................................................................................... 277
10.3 Code Tables ................................................................
................................................................................................
...........................................................................................
........................................................... 280

c-5
B-63323EN-2/01 1.GENERAL

1 GENERAL
Some NC programs such as programs created using custom
macros need not be modified once created. Others such as
machining programs differ depending on the machining
target.
This function can convert a custom macro program created
by the machine tool builder to an executable macro program,
load the executable macro program (P-CODE macro) into F-
ROM (FLASH ROM module), and execute it.
The function which converts a custom macro program to an
executable macro program is called the macro compiler.
The function which reads and executes a P-CODE macro is
called the macro executor.

Features
• The execution speed is high because a custom macro
program is loaded after converted to an executable so that
the machining time can be reduced and the machining
precision can be improved.
• Any custom macro is not destroyed because it is loaded
into F-ROM so that reliability is improved.
• Because any program converted to an executable is not
displayed on the program screen, the know-how the
machine tool builder has can be protected.
• Because executable macro programs are loaded into F-
ROM, program editing memory can efficiently be used.
• The users can call each executable macro program using a
simple call procedure without considering the loaded
program.
• A conversational macro (talk macro) function is available.
This function allows the machine tool builder to create
original screens.
• An auxiliary macro function is available. This function
can execute each P-CODE macro regardless of which mode
or screen is selected.
• Programming errors in each P-CODE macro to be
executed using the conversational macro (talk macro)
function or auxiliary macro function can easily be detected
using a debugging function.

-1-
1.GENERAL B-63323EN-2/01

Differences from the FS15-B

(1) Any custom macro program cannot be converted to an
executable macro program using the CNC itself.
(2) Each executable macro program can be executed only
after loaded into F-ROM.

This manual covers the following models.

In this manual, the following abbreviations may be used for
the models:

Model name Abbreviations

FANUC Series 15i-MA 15i-MA Series15i
FANUC Series 150i-MA 150i-MA Series150i

Definitions of terms
Terms which appear in this manual are defined as follows.

(1) P-CODE macro and P-CODE program

Executable macro program created by the machine tool
builder that is compiled and loaded into F-ROM

(2) Execution macro

Macro program for moving the machine that is a P-CODE
macro

(3) Conversational macro (talk macro)

Macro program for processing screens that is a P-CODE
macro

(4) Auxiliary macro

Macro program for performing auxiliary processing of
execution macros and conversational macros (talk
macros) that is a P-CODE macro

(5) User program

Program each end user creates in program editing
memory

-2-
B-63323EN-2/01 2.MACRO COMPILER AND MACRO EXECUTOR

2 MACRO COMPILER AND MACRO

EXECUTOR

-3-
2.MACRO COMPILER AND MACRO EXECUTOR B-63323EN-2/01

2.1 Macro Compiler

The macro compiler converts (compiles) a custom macro

program (P-CODE source program) to an executable macro
program. Then, the macro compiler links the executable
macro program with compile parameters and converts it to a
MEM-format file.
The macro compiler loads the created MEM-format file into
F-ROM (FLASH ROM module).
Note) For details such as operation procedures, refer to
"FAPT Macro Compiler for PC Programming Manual"
(B-66102E).

2.1.1 P-CODE macro and P-CODE file

A ROM-format file created by linking an executable macro

program compiled on a personal computer and compile
parameters is called a P-CODE file. A P-CODE file is
converted to a MEM-format file and the MEM-format file is
loaded from the memory card into Series 15i F-ROM. A P-
CODE file loaded into F-ROM can also be saved onto a
memory card.

-4-
B-63323EN-2/01 2.MACRO COMPILER AND MACRO EXECUTOR

Conceptual diagram of loading and saving of a P-CODE file

Series 15i

P-CODE file
LOAD
Compile
parameters
SAVE Conversion to
the memory
P-CODE Memory card card format
macro

F-ROM
P-CODE file

Compile&Link

8500=00100000
O9000; 8501=00000001
#1=#2+#5; :
:
M99;

P-CODE Compile parameters

source program

P-CODE file size

Use compile parameters R05 and R10 (bits 3 and 5 of
parameter No. 8500) to set the P-CODE file size.

P-CODE file size R10 R05

256K byte 0 0
512K byte 0 1
1024K byte 1 0
Undefined 1 1

If the ROM-format file created by linking compile

parameters is larger than the size set as listed above, an
error (ROM SIZE OVER) occurs when the macro linker is
executed.

CAUTION
To use a P-CODE file whose size is 512K bytes or
larger, an option is required. If a P-CODE file
loaded into the CNC is larger than the size allowed
by the option, the CNC does not start up with error
USER FILE(P-CODE):SIZE OVER.
-5-
2.MACRO COMPILER AND MACRO EXECUTOR B-63323EN-2/01

P-CODE macro size

The actual size of a P-CODE macro which can be created
depends on the P-CODE file size as listed below.

P-CODE file size P-CODE macro size

1024K byte 1003K byte
512K byte 491K byte
256K byte 235K byte

-6-
B-63323EN-2/01 2.MACRO COMPILER AND MACRO EXECUTOR

2.2 Macro Executor

The macro executor has execution macro function,

conversational macro (talk macro) function, and auxiliary
macro function.

Execution macro function

When the user specifies a G, M, T, or specific code specified
by a compile parameter from a user program, the execution
macro function calls and executes the macro program for
moving the machine (execution macro) that is a P-CODE
macro.
The user can also execute a user program not to call an
execution macro, but to execute a custom macro program.

Conversational macro (talk macro) function

When function key is pressed, the conversational
macro (talk macro) function calls and executes a macro
program for processing screens (conversational macro [talk
macro]) that is a P-CODE macro.

Auxiliary macro function

At power-on, the auxiliary macro function calls and executes
a macro program for performing auxiliary processing
(auxiliary macro) that is a P-CODE macro.

-7-
2.MACRO COMPILER AND MACRO EXECUTOR B-63323EN-2/01

2.3 P-CODE Macro

A P-CODE macro means an executable macro program

created by compiling a P-CODE source program using the
macro compiler and loaded it into F-ROM.

Program number
The program number range is from 1 to 99999999.

Sequence number
The sequence number range is from 1 to 99999999.

• Caution
CAUTION
No sequence number must be added to any block
with an O number.
(The sequence number is invalidated if added.)

Number of digits of a valid setting

The maximum number of digits of a valid setting is 9.

Maximum number of P-CODE macros

The maximum number of P-CODE macros is 1000.

2.3.1 Limitations on commands

NOTE
For each macro executor function, there may be
limitations other than listed below. See the
explanation of each macro executor function.

Custom macro
Custom macro commands can be used for P-CODE macros,
but some commands cannot be used and some commands can
be used with restrictions as listed below.

15i-MA/150i-MA custom macro command P-CODE macro

A constant value consisting of up to 12 digits A constant value
can be specified in <expression>. consisting of up to nine
Maximum value: ±999999999999 digits can be specified.
Minimum value : ±0.00000000001 Maximum value:
+999999999
Minimum value:
+0.00000001

-8-
B-63323EN-2/01 2.MACRO COMPILER AND MACRO EXECUTOR

15i-MA/150i-MA custom macro command P-CODE macro

Abbreviation of each arithmetic or logic Cannot be used.
operation command (first two characters such
as RO for ROUND or FI for FIX)
System variable name command Cannot be used.
System constant name command Cannot be used.
Retention-type custom macro common variable Cannot be used.
name command
SETVN Cannot be used.
ATAN[#j] Cannot be used.
ATAN[#j,#k] Cannot be used.
ATN[#j] Cannot be used.
ATN[#j,#k] Cannot be used.
ATN[#j/#k] Cannot be used.
RND[#j] Cannot be used.
SQR[#j] Cannot be used.
POW[#i,#j] Cannot be used.

Optional block skip

When a block with a sequence number is skipped using the
optional block skip function, a block consisting of only the
sequence number is created.

EXAMPLE
Original program Command to be executed when
skipped
/1 N1 X100.; N1;
N2 /2 Y200.; N2;

When N1 is skipped as listed above, the same operation

as for N2 is performed.

CAUTION
An optional-block skip command can be executed in
execution, auxiliary, and conversational (talk)
macros. Carefully execute the command so that
the same optional-block skip signal will not be used.

-9-
2.MACRO COMPILER AND MACRO EXECUTOR B-63323EN-2/01

2.3.2 Differences from the FS15-B

Function FS15-B FS15i

Program • Programs which can be • Programs which can be
created: O1 to O9999 created: O1 to
• Maximum number of O99999999
loaded programs: 400 • Maximum number of
loaded programs: 1000
Sequence • N1 to N99999 • N1 to N99999999
number
Number of digits • Up to 8 • Up to 9
of a valid setting

- 10 -
B-63323EN-2/01 3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION

3 EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION

- 11 -
3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

3.1 General

Execution macro
An execution macro is a loaded P-CODE macro which is
operated as a machining program.
M, S, T, and other call codes are set for parameters in
advance. When a set code is specified, the corresponding
execution macro is called. For an execution macro, the same
items as for a custom macro can be specified.

User program/
custom macro
A user program means an NC program loaded into program
memory or an NC program to be executed as an execution
macro caller during DNC or MDI operation.

A custom macro means an NC program to be called as a

macro or subprogram in a user program.

- 12 -
B-63323EN-2/01 3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION

3.2 Calling an Execution Macro

Macro call and

subprogram call
Execution macro calls can roughly be divided into two types:
macro calls and subprogram calls. Macro calls differ from
subprogram calls as follows.

Macro call Subprogram call

Argument Allowed. Not allowed.
specification
NC command An NC command preceding The execution macro is
specified in the a call command causes an called after the NC
same block alarm (PS0090: Duplicate statement is executed.
NC statement/macro
statement). An NC
command following a call
code is treated as an
argument.
Local variable The level changes. The level does not
change.

Simple calls and modal calls are also included in macro calls.
A simple call (also called a macro call) calls an execution
macro only in the specified block. A modal call calls an
execution macro in each block until G67 is specified.

Types of calls
Call Program number Remarks
Simple call (G65) Specified at No execution macro can
address P. be called from any user
program using this
command.
Modal call (G66 or G66.1) Specified at No execution macro can
address P. be called from any user
program using this
command.
Macro call using a G code O901 to O9019 Only G codes with no
decimal point can be used.
Modal calls are allowed.
Macro calls with G codes Set for Only G codes with no
(Specification of Multiple G parameters. decimal point can be used.
codes) Modal calls are allowed.
Macro call using an M code O9020 to O9029
Macro call using a T code O9008
Macro call using an axis O9009 or O9031
address to O9054
Subprogram call (M98) Specified at No execution macro can
address P. be called from any user
program using this
command.

- 13 -
3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

Call Program number Remarks

Subprogram call using an M O9001 to O9003
code
Subprogram call using an M O9009
code in the specified range
Subprogram call using an S O9029
code
Subprogram call using a T O9000
code
Subprogram call using a O9028
second auxiliary function
code
Subprogram call using a O9004, O9005
specific code
Subprogram call for a user Specified at A user program in program
program(*1) address P. memory is called from an
execution macro.
P-CODE workpiece number Set for a control An execution macro is
search variable. called preceding the main
program at the start of
automatic operation.

*1 Function specific to execution macros. This function

calls no execution macro.

Calls that can be specified

There are many execution macro calls as listed above. The
calls that can be specified depend on the calling program.

• When an execution macro is

called from a user program
• Macro call using a G code
• Macro calls with G codes (Specification of Multiple G codes)
• Macro call using an M code
• Macro call using a T code
• Macro call using an axis address
• Subprogram call using an M code
• Subprogram call using an S code
• Subprogram call using a T code
• Subprogram call using a second auxiliary function code
• Subprogram call using a specific code
• Subprogram call using an M code in the specified range

• When an execution macro is called

from another execution macro
• Simple execution macro call (G65)
• Modal execution macro call (G66 or G66.1)
• Subprogram execution macro call (M98)
• Macro call using a G code
• Macro calls with G codes (Specification of Multiple G codes)

- 14 -
B-63323EN-2/01 3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION

• Macro call using an M code

• Macro call using a T code
• Macro call using an axis address
• Subprogram call using an M code
• Subprogram call using an S code
• Subprogram call using a T code
• Subprogram call using a second auxiliary function code
• Subprogram call using a specific code
• Subprogram call using an M code in the specified range

• When a user program is called

from an execution macro
• External device subprogram call (M198)
• Subprogram call for a user program

Priority of calls
When a call code is set together with a custom macro or
another call code, they are executed according to the priority
listed in the following table.

Priority Call
Macro call/subprogram call which calls a custom macro
High Simple call (G65)
↑ Modal call (G66 or G66.1)
 Macro call using a G code
 Macro calls with G codes (Specification of Multiple G codes)
 Macro call using an M code
 Macro call using a T code
 Macro call using an axis address
 Subprogram call (M98)
 External device subprogram call (M198)(*2)
 Subprogram call for a user program
 Subprogram call using an M code
 Subprogram call using an S code
 Subprogram call using a T code
↓ Subprogram call using a second auxiliary function code
Low Subprogram call using a specific code
Subprogram call using an M code in the specified range

*2 This priority is applied when an external device

subprogram call is executed from an execution macro.

EXAMPLE
When M100 is set in a macro call using an M code
and a subprogram call using an M code, it operates
as a macro call using an M code if actually
executed.

- 15 -
3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

Nesting
Execution macro calls can be nested to a depth of ten levels
including only subprogram calls, to a depth of five levels
including only macro calls, or to a depth of ten levels
including subprogram calls and macro calls (to a depth of five
levels for macro calls). This does not include custom
macros.

Subprogram calls for user programs and external device

subprogram calls from execution macros are included in the
custom macro nesting levels.

3.2.1 Simple call (G65)

The execution macro specified at address P is called as a

macro.

Format
G65 Pp Ll <argument> ;
G65 : Call command. Must be specified before any argument.
P : Program number of an execution macro to be called
L : Repetition count (1 by default)
Argument : Data to be passed to the execution macro. Argument
specifications I and II are available.

Limitation
No execution macro can be called from any user program
using this command. This command can be specified only
for calling an execution macro from another execution macro.

- 16 -
B-63323EN-2/01 3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION

3.2.2 Modal call (G66 or G66.1)

A modal call is performed for the execution macro specified at

address P.
The functions such as move command calling (G66) and per-
block calling (G66.1) operation and modal call nesting are
exactly the same as for custom macros.

Format
G66 Pp Ll <argument> ;
G66 : Call command. Must be specified before any argument.
p : Program number of an execution macro to be called
l : Repetition count (1 by default)
argument : Data to be passed to the execution macro. Argument
specifications I and II are available. Arguments only in G66
blocks are passed to local variables.

G66.1 Pp Ll <argument> ;
G66.1 : Call command. Must be specified before argument.
p : Program number of an execution macro to be called
l : Repetition count (1 by default)
Argument : Data to be passed to the execution macro. Argument
specifications I and II are available.

Limitation
No execution macro can be called from any user program
using this command. This command can be specified only
for calling an execution macro from another execution macro.

3.2.3 Macro call using a G code

Execution macro O9010 to O9019 is called using the G code

specified for parameter No. 8513 to 8522 as a macro.
When a negative G code is set for a parameter, a modal call is
performed for the corresponding execution macro. Bit 2 of
parameter No. 8509 (MCT) is used to select the G66 or G66.1
mode.

Format
Gg Ll <argument> ;
g : Call code. Must be specified before any argument.
l : Repetition count (1 by default)
argument : Data to be passed to the execution macro. Argument
specifications I and II are available.

- 17 -
3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

Correspondence between parameter numbers and program numbers

Program number Parameter number
O9010 8513
O9011 8514
O9012 8515
O9013 8516
O9014 8517
O9015 8518
O9016 8519
O9017 8520
O9018 8521
O9019 8522

Limitations
1 No macro call using a G code can be performed from any
macro called using a G code including a custom macro.
If such a macro call using a G code is specified, the code
operates as an ordinary G code.

2 When bit 7 of parameter No. 8509 (GMP) is set to 1, no

macro call using a G code can be performed from any
macro or subprogram including a custom macro called by
a macro or subprogram call using an M, S, T, second
auxiliary function, or specific code, or axis address. If
such a macro call using a G code is specified, the code
operates as an ordinary G code.

3.2.4 Macro calls with G codes (Specification of Multiple G codes)

Execution macros to be called using a G code can be added by

setting the start number of G codes to be used for macro calls,
the start number of execution macros to be called, and the
number of definitions for parameters. When a negative
number is set as the start G code number, modal calls are
defined for the corresponding execution macros. Bit 2 of
parameter No. 8509 (MCT) is used to select the G66 or G66.1
mode.

Format
Gg Ll <argument> ;
g : Call code. Must be specified before any argument.
l : Repetition count (1 by default)
argument : Data to be passed to the execution macro. Argument
specifications I and II are available.

- 18 -
B-63323EN-2/01 3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION

Parameter setting
Parameter No. 8551: Start G code number
Parameter No. 8552: Start execution macro number
Parameter No. 8546: Number of definitions

EXAMPLE
When 900 is set for parameter No. 8551, 8000 is
set for parameter No. 8552, and 100 is set for
parameter No. 8546, the macro calls for the
following combinations are defined. When -900 is
set for parameter No. 8551, the modal calls for the
same combinations are defined.
G900 →O8000
G901 →O8001
G902 →O8002
:
G999 →O8099

Limitations
1 This type of macro call using a G code cannot be
performed from any macro called using a G code
including a custom macro. If such a macro call using a
G code is specified, the code operates as an ordinary G
code.

2 When bit 7 of parameter No. 8509 (GMP) is set to 1, no

macro call using a G code can be performed from any
macro or subprogram including a custom macro called by
a macro or subprogram call using an M, S, T, second
auxiliary function, or specific code, or axis address. If
such a macro call using a G code is specified, the code
operates as an ordinary G code.

3 This type of macro call is invalidated in the following

cases:
<1> A value outside the valid range is set for a
parameter.
<2> The defined G code range exceeds 9999.
<3> The defined program number range exceeds
99999999.

4 G65, G66, G67, and G codes used for macro calls are not
used as call commands in this type of macro call even
when included in the setting range.

- 19 -
3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

3.2.5 Macro call using an M code

Execution macro O9020 to 9029 is called using the M code

specified for parameter No. 8523 to 8532 as a macro.

Format
Mm Ll <argument> ;
m : Call code. Must be specified before any argument.
l : Repetition count (1 by default)
argument : Data to be passed to the execution macro. Argument
specifications I and II are available.

Correspondence between parameter numbers and program numbers

Program number Parameter number
O9020 8523
O9021 8524
O9022 8525
O9023 8526
O9024 8527
O9025 8528
O9026 8529
O9027 8530
O9028 8531
O9029 8532

Limitations
1 No macro call using an M code can be performed from
any macro or subprogram including a custom macro
called by a macro or subprogram call using an M, S, T,
second auxiliary function, or specific code, or axis
address. If such a macro call using an M code is
specified, the code operates as an ordinary M code.

2 When bit 7 of parameter No. 8509 (GMP) is set to 1, no

macro call using an M code can also be performed from
any macro called using a G code including a custom
macro. If such a macro call using an M code is specified,
the code operates as an ordinary M code.

- 20 -
B-63323EN-2/01 3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION

3.2.6 Macro call using a T code

When bit 6 of parameter No. 8502 (TMC) and bit 2 of

parameter No. 8508 (TEC) are set to 1, execution macro
O9008 is called using a T code as a macro.

Format
Tt <argument> ;
t : Call code
argument : Data to be passed to the execution macro

Parameters
When bit 6 of parameter No. 8502 (TMC) and bit 2 of
parameter No. 8508 (TEC) are set to 1, this type of macro call
is enabled. These parameters are initialized to the values
set for P-CODE at power-on.

Bit 0 of parameter No. 8603 (TCM) can be used to disable

this type of macro call as required. TCM can be changed
from MDI because it is an ordinary parameter.

Variable
Variable #8691 can be used to enable or disable this type of
call and check the setting. The value set for this variable is
reflected in bit 0 of parameter No. 8603 (TCM).

#8691= 0: Enables a call using a T code. (TCM = 0)

= 1: Disables a call using a T code. (TCM = 1)

NOTES
1 A value other than 0 or 1 cannot be set for this
variable.
2 It may take time until the value set for the variable is
reflected in bit 0 of parameter No. 8603 (TCM),
depending on the CNC operation status. Whether
this type of macro call is enabled or disabled
depends on the value set for the parameter when the
macro call is issued.
3 This variable can be written and referenced using an
execution macro, conversational macro (talk macro),
or auxiliary macro.

Call code
In contrast to a macro call using a G or M code, a T code in a
block is used as a call command unless another call command
is specified before the T code.

- 21 -
3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

EXAMPLE
When a macro call using a T code and a
subprogram call using M100 are enabled for the
machine
a) T123 M06; Calls a macro using T123.
b) G01 X100. T123; Calls a macro using T123.
c) T123 M100; Calls a macro using T123.
d) M100 T123; Processes T123 as a T
code, then calls a
subprogram using M100.

Arguments
1 All addresses other than addresses O and N, and the
address for a subprogram call using a specific code that
can be specified for the target machine are used as
arguments.
When an address is specified with no decimal point, the
value passed to the local variable differs depending on
the setting of bit 5 of parameter No. 8558 (ACA) as
follows:
ACA = 0: Always passes the value as an integer.
= 1: Adds a decimal point according to the setting
of bit 0 of parameter No. 2400 (DPI).

2 There are the following relationships between addresses

and local variables:
The first five addresses G in ascending order of G code
groups are used as arguments and passed to variables
#28 to #32.
Address L is passed to variable #12.
Address P is passed to variable #16.
Address T is passed to variable #27.

Variable Variable Variable

Address Address Address
number number number
A #1 I #4 S #19
B #2 J #5 T #27
C #3 K #6 U #21
D #7 L #12 V #22
E #8 M #13 W #23
F #9 P #16 X #24
G #28 to 32 Q #17 Y #25
H #11 R #18 Z #26

- 22 -
B-63323EN-2/01 3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION

EXAMPLE
When G91 G28 X123.45678 T999; is specified for
an IS-B machine, values are passed as follows:
#24 →123.457
#27 →999.0
#28 → 28.0
#29 → 91.0

Limitations
1 No macro call using a T code can be performed from any
macro or subprogram including a custom macro called by
a macro or subprogram call using an M, S, T, second
auxiliary function, or specific code, or axis address. If
such a macro call using a T code is specified, the code
operates as an ordinary T code.

2 When bit 7 of parameter No. 8509 (GMP) is set to 1, no

macro call using a T code can also be performed from any
macro called using a G code including a custom macro.
If such a macro call using a T code is specified, the code
operates as an ordinary T code.

3 No repetition count can be specified because address L is

also used as an argument.

Difference from the FS15-B

The FS15-B evaluates the specified address, then calls an
execution macro. For this reason, the FS15-B changes the
modal status at the specified address, then calls an execution
macro.
The FS15i calls an execution macro without changing the
modal status at the specified address because it does not
evaluates the specified address.

3.2.7 Macro call using an axis address

When parameters Nos. 8555 to 8557 are set, an execution

macro is called using an axis address (controlled axis move
command) as a macro.

Format
Xx <argument> ;
x : Call code
argument : Data to be passed to the execution macro

- 23 -
3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

Selecting axes
Select the target controlled axes for a macro call using each
bit of parameters Nos. 8555 to 8557 for each axis. These
parameters are initialized to the values set for P-CODE at
power-on.

For the target axes for a macro call, a macro call can also be
disabled using each bit of parameters Nos. 8600 to 8602 for
each axis for which the macro call is to be disabled as
required. These parameters can be changed using MDI
because they are ordinary parameters.

EXAMPLE
When parameter No. 8555 is set to 00000111 for a
machine having five axes, X, Y, Z, A, and C, a
macro call is enabled for X, Y, and Z axes.
When parameter No. 8600 is set to 00000101, a
macro call is disabled for X and Z axes.

Variable
Variable #8690 can be used to set and check each axis for
which this type of macro call is disabled. The value set for
this variable is reflected in parameters Nos. 8600 to 8602.
The following shows the relationships between variable
settings and parameter settings:

#8690
= 1: Disables the macro call for the first axis.
(Bit 0 of parameter No. 8600 = 1)
= 2: Disables the macro call for the second axis.
(Bit 1 of parameter No. 8600 = 1)
= 4: Disables the macro call for the third axis.
(Bit 2 of parameter No. 8600 = 1)
•
•
= 8388608: Disables the macro call for the 24th axis.
(Bit 7 of parameter No. 8602 = 1)

To disable the macro call for multiple axes, set the algebraic
sum of the value set for each axis.

EXAMPLE
To disable a call for the first and third axes, set
variable #8690 to (1 + 4) = 5.

- 24 -
B-63323EN-2/01 3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION

NOTES
1 It may take time until the value set for the variable is
reflected in parameters Nos. 8600 to 8602,
depending on the CNC operation status. Whether
a macro call is enabled or disabled depends on the
values set for the parameters when the macro call is
issued.
2 This variable can be written and referenced using an
execution macro, conversational macro (talk macro),
or auxiliary macro.

Selecting an execution macro

When multiple axes for which macro calls are enabled are set,
whether to always call the same execution macro or call an
execution macro for each axis can be selected using bit 0 of
parameter No. 8558 (ACS).

ACS = 0: Always calls O9009.

= 1: First axis specification →Calls O9031.
Second axis specification →Calls O9032.
:
nth axis specification →Calls O9030+n

Call code
1 In contrast to a macro call using a G or M code, an axis
address specified as a call code in a block is used as a call
command unless another call code is specified before the
axis address.

2 When multiple axis addresses for macro calls are

specified in the same block, the axis address which
appears first in the block is used as a call command.

EXAMPLE
When a macro call using X and Y and a
subprogram call using M100 are enabled for the
machine
a) X100. B10; Calls a macro using X100.
b) G91 G01 X100.; Calls a macro using X100.
c) Y200. X100.; Calls a macro using Y200.
d) X100. M100; Calls a macro using X100.
e) M100 X100.; Calls a subprogram using
M100 after the tool moves
along the X axis according to
X100.

- 25 -
3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

Arguments
1 All addresses other than addresses O and N, and the
address for a subprogram call using a specific code that
can be specified for the target machine are used as
arguments.

When an address is specified with no decimal point, the

value passed to the local variable differs depending on
the setting of bit 5 of parameter No. 8558 (ACA) as
follows:
ACA = 0: Always passes the value as an integer.
= 1: Adds a decimal point according to the setting
of bit 0 of parameter No. 2400 (DPI).

2 There are the following relationships between addresses

and local variables:
The axis address used as a call code is passed to variable
#27.
The first five addresses G in ascending order of G code
groups are used as arguments and passed to variables
#28 to #32.
Address L is passed to variable #12.
Address P is passed to variable #16.

Variable Variable Variable

Address Address Address
number number number
A #1 I #4 S #19
B #2 J #5 T #20
C #3 K #6 U #21
D #7 L #12 V #22
E #8 M #13 W #23
F #9 P #16 X #24
G #28 to 32 Q #17 Y #25
H #11 R #18 Z #26

EXAMPLE
When G91 G28 X123.45678 T999; is specified for
an IS-B machine, values are passed as follows:
#20 →999.0
#27 →123.457
#28 → 28.0
#29 → 91.0

Limitations
1 No macro call using an axis address can be performed
from any macro or subprogram including a custom
macro called by a macro or subprogram call using an M,
S, T, second auxiliary function, or specific code, or axis
address. If such a macro call using an axis address is

- 26 -
B-63323EN-2/01 3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION

specified, the address operates as an ordinary axis

command.

2 When bit 7 of parameter No. 8509 (GMP) is set to 1, no

macro call using an axis address can also be performed
from any macro called using a G code including a custom
macro. If such a macro call using an axis address is
specified, the address operates as an ordinary axis
command.
3 No repetition count can be specified because address L is
also used as an argument.

Difference from the FS15-B

The FS15-B evaluates the specified address, then calls an
execution macro. For this reason, the FS15-B changes the
modal status at the specified address, then calls an execution
macro.
The FS15i calls an execution macro without changing the
modal status at the specified address because it does not
evaluates the specified address.

3.2.8 Subprogram call (M98)

The execution macro specified at address P is called as a

subprogram.

Format
M98 Pp Ll;
M98 : Call command
p : Program number of an execution macro to be called
L : Repetition count (1 by default)

Limitation
No execution macro can be called from any user program
using this command. This command can be specified only
for calling an execution macro from another execution macro.

3.2.9 Subprogram call using an M code

Execution macro O9001 to O9003 is called as a subprogram

using the M code specified for parameter No. 8510 to 8512.

Format
Mm Ll;
m : Call code

- 27 -
3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

L : Repetition count (1 by default)

Correspondence between parameter numbers and program numbers

Program number Parameter number
O9001 8510
O9002 8511
O9003 8512

1 No subprogram call using an M code can be performed

from any macro or subprogram including a custom
macro called by a macro or subprogram call using an M,
S, T, second auxiliary function, or specific code, or axis
address. If such a subprogram call using an M code is
specified, the code operates as an ordinary M code.

2 When bit 7 of parameter No. 8509 (GMP) is set to 1, no

subprogram call using an M code can also be performed
from any macro called using a G code including a custom
macro. If such a subprogram call using an M code is
specified, the code operates as an ordinary M code.

3.2.10 Subprogram call using an M code in the specified range

Execution macro O9009 is called as a subprogram using an M

code in the range specified by parameters Nos. 8538 and
8539.

Format
Mm Ll;
m: Call code
L: Repetition count (1 by default)

Argument
The specified M code is passed to variable #148.

Limitations
1 No subprogram call using an M code in the specified
range can be performed from any macro or subprogram
including a custom macro called by a macro or
subprogram call using an M, S, T, second auxiliary
function, or specific code, or axis address. If such a
subprogram call using an M code is specified, the code
operates as an ordinary M code.

- 28 -
B-63323EN-2/01 3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION

2 When bit 7 of parameter No. 8509 (GMP) is set to 1, no

subprogram call using an M code in the specified range
can also be performed from any macro called using a G
code including a custom macro. If such a subprogram
call using an M code is specified, the code operates as an
ordinary M code.

3 This type of subprogram call is invalidated in the

following cases:
<1> A value outside the valid range is set for a
parameter.
<2> The value set for parameter No. 8538 is greater
than the value set for parameter No. 8539.

4 M98, M99, and M codes used for macro and subprogram

calls are not used as call codes in this type of
subprogram call even when included in the setting
range.

3.2.11 Subprogram call using an S code

When bit 3 of parameter No. 8508 (SSC) is set to 1, execution

macro O9029 is called as a subprogram using an S code.

Format
Ss Ll;
s: Call code
L: Repetition count (1 by default)

Argument
The specified S code is passed to variable #147.

Limitations
1 No subprogram call using an S code can be performed
from any macro or subprogram including a custom
macro called by a macro or subprogram call using an M,
S, T, second auxiliary function, or specific code, or axis
address. If such a subprogram call using an S code is
specified, the code operates as an ordinary S code.

2 When bit 7 of parameter No. 8509 (GMP) is set to 1, no

subprogram call using an S code can also be performed
from any macro called using a G code including a custom
macro. If such a subprogram call using an S code is
specified, the code operates as an ordinary S code.

- 29 -
3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

3.2.12 Subprogram call using a T code

When bit 6 of parameter No. 8502 (TMC) is set to 0 and bit 2

of parameter No. 8508 (TEC) is set to 1, execution macro
O9000 is called as a subprogram using a T code.

Format
Tt Ll;
T: Call code
L: Repetition count (1 by default)

Parameters
Setting bit 6 of parameter No. 8502 (TMC) to 0 and bit 2 of
parameter No. 8508 (TEC) to 1 enables this type of
subprogram call. These parameters are initialized to the
values set for P-CODE at power-on.
Bit 0 of parameter No. 8603 (TCM) can be used to disable
this type of subprogram call as required. This parameter
can be changed from MDI because it is an ordinary
parameter.

Variable
Variable #8691 can be used to enable or disable this type of
subprogram call and check the setting. The value set for
this variable is reflected in bit 0 of parameter No. 8603
(TCM).

#8691 = 0: Enables a call using a T code. (TCM = 0)

= 1: Disables a call using a T code. (TCM = 1)

NOTES
1 A value other than 0 or 1 cannot be set for this
variable.
2 It may take time until the value set for the variable is
reflected in bit 0 of parameter No. 8603 (TCM),
depending on the CNC operation status. Whether
this type of call is enabled or disabled depends on
the value set for the parameter when the call is
issued.
3 This variable can be written and referenced using an
execution macro, conversational macro (talk macro),
or auxiliary macro.

Argument
The specified T code is passed to variable #149.

- 30 -
B-63323EN-2/01 3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION

Limitations
1 No subprogram call using a T code can be performed
from any macro or subprogram including a custom
macro called by a macro or subprogram call using an M,
S, T, second auxiliary function, or specific code, or axis
address. If such a subprogram call using a T code is
specified, the code operates as an ordinary T code.

2 When bit 7 of parameter No. 8509 (GMP) is set to 1, no

subprogram call using a T code can also be performed
from any macro called using a G code including a custom
macro. If such a subprogram call using a T code is
specified, the code operates as an ordinary T code.

3.2.13 Subprogram call using a second auxiliary function code

When bit 5 of parameter No. 8508 (BSC) is set to 1, execution

macro O9028 is called as a subprogram using a second
auxiliary function code.

Format
Bb Ll;
b : Call code
l : Repetition count (1 by default)

Argument
The specified second auxiliary function code is passed to
variable #146.

Limitations
1 No subprogram call using a second auxiliary function
code can be performed from any macro or subprogram
including a custom macro called by a macro or
subprogram call using an M, S, T, second auxiliary
function, or specific code, or axis address. If such a
subprogram call using a second auxiliary function code is
specified, the code operates as an ordinary second
auxiliary function code.

2 When bit 7 of parameter No. 8509 (GMP) is set to 1, no

subprogram call using a second auxiliary function code
can also be performed from any macro called using a G
code including a custom macro. If such a subprogram
call using a second auxiliary function code is specified,
the code operates as an ordinary second auxiliary
function code.

- 31 -
3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

3.2.14 Subprogram call using a specific code

When bit 0 (AC1) or 1 (AC2) of parameter No. 8508 is set to 1,

execution macro O9004 or O9005 is called at the NC address
specified for parameter No. 8544 or 8545 as a subprogram.

Format
Aa Ll;
a : Call code
l : Repetition count (1 by default)

Call code
None of addresses O, N, P, L, and G and axis name addresses
can be used as the call command for a subprogram call using
a specific code.

Correspondence among parameter numbers,

program numbers, and argument numbers
Parameter for Parameter for a Program
Argument
enabling a call call code number
AC1 (No.8508#0) No.8544 O9004 #146
AC2 (No.8508#1) No.8545 O9005 #147

Limitations
1 No subprogram call using a specific code can be
performed from any macro or subprogram including a
custom macro called by a macro or subprogram call
using an M, S, T, second auxiliary function, or specific
code, or axis address. If such a subprogram call using a
specific code is specified, the code operates as an
ordinary NC address.

2 When bit 7 of parameter No. 8509 (GMP) is set to 1, no

subprogram call using a specific code can also be
performed from any macro called using a G code
including a custom macro. If such a subprogram call
using a specific code is specified, the code operates as an
ordinary NC address.

- 32 -
B-63323EN-2/01 3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION

3.2.15 Subprogram call for a user program

A user program is called as a subprogram using the M code

specified for parameter No. 8533.

Format
Mm Pp Ll;
m : Call code
p : Program number of a user program to be called
l : Repetition count (1 by default)

Nesting and local variables

Each subprogram call for a user program is assumed to call a
custom macro as a subprogram using M98 and is counted
among custom macro nesting levels.
The local variables of the calling execution macro are passed.

3.2.16 P-CODE workpiece number search

When automatic operation is started in the memory or DNC

operation mode, the execution macro specified for variable
#8610 is executed before the main program.

Call conditions and operation

a) Bit 5 of parameter No. 8507 (PWS) is set to 1.
b) The memory or DNC operation mode is selected.
c) The program number of an execution macro is set for
variable #8610 using a conversational macro (talk
macro) or auxiliary macro before the start of automatic
operation.

When the above three conditions are satisfied, starting

automatic operation:
(1) Calls the execution macro specified for variable #8610.
Use bit 4 of parameter No. 8558 (P98) to select the
simple call (G65) or subprogram call (M98) mode.
(2) Executes the main program after termination of the
execution macro.

- 33 -
3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

Warning
WARNING
When conditions a) to c) are satisfied, this function
calls an execution macro regardless of the user
program to be started. For this reason, take
countermeasures such as issuing a warning
message using an auxiliary macro or PMC and
setting interlock processing to prevent operator
errors when using this function.

Nesting and local variables

The execution macro is counted among execution macro
nesting levels. Because the execution macro is called in the
simple call (G65) or subprogram call (M98) mode, another
execution macro can be called from the called execution
macro using any call method.

In the simple call (G65) mode, the execution macro is

executed using a local variable level different from the level
the main program uses. In other words, the local variables
used by the execution macro are not passed to the main
program.
In the subprogram call (M98) mode, the execution macro uses
the same local variable level as the main program. In other
words, the local variables used by the execution macro are
passed to the main program.

- 34 -
B-63323EN-2/01 3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION

3.3 Limitations on Execution Macros

3.3.1 Commands that cannot be used in execution macros

• Command using a comma (,) such as optional-angle

chamfering/corner rounding
• SETVN
• Abbreviation of each arithmetic or logic operation
command (first two characters such as RO for ROUND or
FI for FIX)
• Following commands added to the FS15i
ATAN[#j], ATAN[#j,#k], ATN[#j]/[#k], ATN[#j],
ATN[#j,#k], POW[#i,#j], RND[#j], SQR[#j]
System variable, system constant, and retention-type
custom macro common variable name commands

3.3.2 Functions which cannot use execution macros

• Playback
• Manual numeric command
• Background drawing

3.3.3 Optional block skip

When a block with a sequence number in an execution macro

is skipped using the optional block skip function, a block
consisting of only the sequence number is created.

EXAMPLE
Original program Command to be executed when
skipped
/1 N1 X100.; N1;
N2 /2 Y200.; N2;

When N1 is skipped as listed above, the same operation

as for N2 is performed.

- 35 -
3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

CAUTION
When such a block is skipped in an execution
macro, the block consists of only the sequence
number with no travel distance. For this reason, if
such a block is skipped in the cutter or another
compensation mode, the tool path may differ from
that in a user program.

- 36 -
B-63323EN-2/01 3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION

3.4 Differences from the FS15-B

Function FS15-B FS15i

Program • Programs which can be • Programs which can be
created: O1 to O9999 created: O1 to
• Maximum number of loaded O99999999
programs: 400 • Maximum number of
loaded programs: 1000
Sequence • N1 to N99999 • N1 to N99999999
number
Nesting • Subprogram calls can be • Subprogram calls can be
nested to a depth of eight nested to a depth of ten
levels. levels.
• Macro calls can be nested • Macro calls can be nested
to a depth of four levels. to a depth of five levels.
Modal call • No modal call can be • A modal call can be
performed from any performed from an
execution macro. execution macro.
• The execution macro called • The execution macro called
by a modal call cannot be by a modal call can be
called. called.
Macro call • Call code: 1 to 255 • Call code: 1 to 999
using a G
code
Macro calls • Up to 40 definitions can be • Up to 255 definitions can
with G codes made. be made.
(Specification • Program numbers: O9000 • Program numbers: O1 to
of Multiple G to O9999 O99999999
codes) • No modal calls can be • Modal calls can be defined.
defined.
Macro call • The modal status is • The macro is called without
using a T code changed at the address changing the modal status
or axis specified in the called block, at the address specified in
address then the macro is called. the called block.
Subprogram • Program numbers: O1 to • Program numbers: O1 to
call for a user O9999 O99999999
program • The return destination • The return destination
sequence number cannot sequence number can be
be specified. specified.
• No execution macro can be • An execution macro can be
called from the called user called from the called user
program. program.
M99 command • The return destination • The return destination
sequence number can be sequence number can be
specified using address P. specified using address P
or Q.
Interruption • No interruption type custom • An interruption type custom
type custom macro is allowed during macro is also allowed
macro execution of an execution during execution of an
macro. execution macro.
P-CODE • A P-CODE workpiece • A P-CODE workpiece
workpiece number search can be number search can be
number performed only in the macro performed in the selected
search call mode. mode, macro or
subprogram call.

- 37 -
3.EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

- 38 -
B-63323EN-2/01 4.CONVERSATIONAL MACRO (TALK MACRO) FUNCTION AND AUXILIARY MACRO FUNCTION

4
CONVERSATIONAL MACRO (TALK
MACRO) FUNCTION AND AUXILIARY
MACRO FUNCTION
The conversational macro (talk macro) function allows the
machine tool builder to create original screens. The
auxiliary macro function can be executed regardless of which
mode or screen is selected.

Conceptual diagram of the conversational macro (talk macro) function and

auxiliary macro function

LCD/MDI

CUSTOM key
Program num ber specification

Conversational macro
Program num ber change Control variable #8500
F-ROM
(talk macro) function
Conversational
macro
(talk macro) At power-on

Parameter No. 8536

Always executed Program number specification

F-ROM
Auxiliary macro
Program number change Control variable #8600
Auxiliary macro
function

At power-on

Parameter No. 8537

- 39 -
4.CONVERSATIONAL MACRO (TALK MACRO) FUNCTION AND AUXILIARY MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

4.1 Conversational Macro (Talk Macro) Function

The conversational macro (talk macro) function

independently executes a conversational macro (talk macro)
loaded into F-ROM in parallel with ordinary part program
operation.
This function is executed at a level lower than that of
automatic operation processing. This function is
independent of the operation mode or automatic operation
status.

Cautions
CAUTIONS
1 The conversational macro (talk macro) function is
executed at a level lower than that of CNC
operation processing. Therefore, execution of the
conversational macro (talk macro) function does
not affect the speed of CNC operation processing,
but the speed at which the conversational macro
(talk macro) function is executed may become low
during CNC operation. For this reason, the
conversational macro (talk macro) function is not
suitable to control the machine at a constant
processing speed.
2 The conversational macro (talk macro) function
cannot execute any CNC part program statement
for operation.

4.1.1 Execution and termination

Execution
Execute the conversational macro (talk macro) function using
one of the following methods:

(1) Press function key CUSTOM

on the MDI panel.

(2) Press function selection key (soft key) "TALK MACRO".

(3) Set the control variable for starting a conversational
macro (talk macro) (#8510) to 1.

- 40 -
B-63323EN-2/01 4.CONVERSATIONAL MACRO (TALK MACRO) FUNCTION AND AUXILIARY MACRO FUNCTION

When the conversational macro (talk macro) function is

executed, the conversational macro (talk macro) main
program with the value of the control variable for executing a
conversational macro (talk macro) (#8500) as the program
number is executed. When the power is turned on, the
value of compile parameter No. 8536 is set for the control
variable for executing a conversational macro (talk macro)
(#8500).

NOTES
1 An error may occur and execution may not be able
to be continued. Such an error includes the case
where no P-CODE macro is found as the
conversational macro (talk macro) with the value of
the control variable for executing a conversational
macro (talk macro) (#8500) as the program
number. In this case, a message indicating that a
fatal error occurs is displayed on the
conversational macro (talk macro) screen. (For
details, see Section 4.5, "Fatal Error.")
2 When the value of the control variable for
executing a conversational macro (talk macro)
(#8500) is 0, the conversational macro (talk macro)
function is executed and only the system display
section is displayed. The system display section
includes the O number, N number, and soft key
frames.

• Initial screen at power-on

When bit 2 of parameter No. 8558 (PWT) is set to 1, the
conversational macro (talk macro) function is executed at
power-on.

Termination
Terminate execution of the conversational macro (talk
macro) function using one of the following methods:

(1) Press a function key (such as POS or PROG ) on the MDI

panel.
(2) Press the function menu key.
(3) Set the control variable for starting a conversational
macro (talk macro) (#8510) to 0.
(4) Set the control variable for executing a conversational
macro (talk macro) (#8500) to 0.
(5) Screen switching request from the system due to an
alarm or another event

- 41 -
4.CONVERSATIONAL MACRO (TALK MACRO) FUNCTION AND AUXILIARY MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

When a program end command (execution control code M99

or M99Pp) in the main program is executed, the
conversational macro (talk macro) function determines
whether any of the above factors that terminates the
conversational macro (talk macro) function has occurred.
When an execution termination factor has occurred, the
conversational macro (talk macro) function switches to the
desired screen for (1), the screen displayed immediately
before the function is executed for (2), (3), or (4), or the screen
requested by the system.
Carefully program a conversational macro (talk macro)
because the conversational macro (talk macro) function uses
a program end command in the main program as a timing as
described above.
If the written program is like the following bad sample
program, the screen cannot be switched to another screen
and the system enters the hang-up state.

Bad sample Good sample

O1234 ; O1234 ;

NO NO
Key input? Key input?

YES YES

Key input processing Key input processing

M99 ; M99 ;

When programming a conversational macro (talk macro),

always specify M99 in the same way as for a PMC ladder
program to create a program which returns to the beginning
of the main program. Alternatively, specify M99Pp to
create a cyclic program which returns to the sequence
number specified for M99Pp.
For the above reasons, do not program a conversational
macro (talk macro) in which the GOTO command causes a
branch in the backward direction.

- 42 -
B-63323EN-2/01 4.CONVERSATIONAL MACRO (TALK MACRO) FUNCTION AND AUXILIARY MACRO FUNCTION

• Forced termination
NOTE
With the 15i-MA, to recover from the hang-up
state, execution of the conversational macro (talk
macro) function can forcibly be terminated.
If the system enters the hang-up state,
simultaneously press SHIFT and RESET . However,
recovery from the hang-up state is not always
guaranteed. Carefully program a conversational
macro (talk macro).

4.1.2 Commands

Commands that can be used

Macro statements and NC statements (special G code
commands) can be written in conversational macros (talk
macros) as in the case of CNC part programs.
Macro statements can contain commands similar to those
which can be written in custom macros and macro variables.
Macro variables include local variables, common variables,
and P-CODE variables. In addition, the macro executor
function is available. This function can read keys, display
screens, and perform other processing.
For details, see Chapter 5, "Macro Variables," and Chapter 6,
"Macro Executor Function."

NOTE
Carefully use system variables #3000, #3003,
#3004, and #3006 because they affect automatic
operation.

Commands that cannot be used

The following custom macro commands are not available:
(1) Modal call and macro call using a G, M, or T code or axis
address
(2) Subprogram call using an M, S, or T code, M code in the
specified range, or second auxiliary function code
(3) External output commands BPRNT, DPRNT, POPEN,
and PCLOS

- 43 -
4.CONVERSATIONAL MACRO (TALK MACRO) FUNCTION AND AUXILIARY MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

4.2 Auxiliary Macro Function

The conversational macro (talk macro) function is executed

using function key CUSTOM
, but the auxiliary macro function
does not need such an operation or command. After power-
on, the auxiliary macro function starts execution.
This function is executed at a level lower than that of
automatic operation processing. This function is
independent of the operation mode or automatic operation
status.

Cautions
CAUTIONS
1 The auxiliary macro function is executed at a level
lower than that of CNC operation processing.
Therefore, execution of the auxiliary macro
function does not affect the speed of CNC
operation processing, but the speed at which the
auxiliary macro function is executed may become
low during CNC operation. For this reason, the
auxiliary macro function is not suitable to control
the machine at a constant processing speed.
2 The auxiliary macro function cannot execute any
CNC part program statement for operation.

4.2.1 Execution and termination

Execution
After power-on, the auxiliary macro function is always
executed.
After the auxiliary macro function enters the constant
execution state, it executes the auxiliary macro main
program with the value of the control variable for executing
an auxiliary macro (#8600) as the program number. When
the power is turned on, the value of compile parameter No.
8537 is set for the control variable for executing an auxiliary
macro (#8600).

- 44 -
B-63323EN-2/01 4.CONVERSATIONAL MACRO (TALK MACRO) FUNCTION AND AUXILIARY MACRO FUNCTION

NOTE
An error may occur and execution may not be able
to be continued. Such an error includes the case
where no P-CODE macro is found as the auxiliary
macro with the value of the control variable for
executing an auxiliary macro (#8600) as the
program number. In this case, a message
indicating that a fatal error occurs is displayed on
the conversational macro (talk macro) screen.
(For details, see Section 4.5, "Fatal Error.")

Termination
The auxiliary macro function does not terminate because it is
always executed. Setting the control variable for executing
an auxiliary macro (#8600) to 0 places the auxiliary macro
function in the wait state when a program end command
(execution control code M99 or M99Pp) in the main program
is executed. The function remains in the wait state until a
program number is set for the control variable for executing
an auxiliary macro (#8600) again.
Program an auxiliary macro as a cyclic program like a
conversational macro (talk macro).

4.2.2 Commands

Commands that can be used

A main difference between the conversational macro (talk
macro) function and auxiliary macro function is that the
control codes for the macro executor function that are related
to key reading and screen display are not available for the
auxiliary macro function. For details, see Chapter 5,
"Macro Variables," and Chapter 6, "Macro Executor
Functions."

NOTE
Carefully use system variables #3000, #3003,
#3004, and #3006 because they affect automatic
operation.

- 45 -
4.CONVERSATIONAL MACRO (TALK MACRO) FUNCTION AND AUXILIARY MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

Commands that cannot be used

The following custom macro commands are not available:
(1) Modal call and macro call using a G, M, or T code or axis
address
(2) Subprogram call using an M, S, or T code, M code in the
specified range, or second auxiliary function code
(3) External output commands BPRNT, DPRNT, POPEN,
and PCLOS

4.2.3 Execution cycle

Whether an auxiliary macro is executed depends on whether

a conversational macro (talk macro) is executed.

When a conversational macro

(talk macro) is executed
Auxiliary macro and conversational macro (talk macro) are
sequentially executed.

NOTE
When an auxiliary macro is executed, a
conversational macro (talk macro) is executed after
execution of a program end command (execution
control code M99 or M99Pp) in the auxiliary macro
main program. After a program end command
(execution control code M99 or M99Pp) in the
conversational macro (talk macro) main program is
executed, execution of the auxiliary macro starts
again.

• FS15i original specification

Selecting the FS15i origination specification using bit 3 of
parameter No. 8558 (15I) can change the execution mode
from sequential to parallel.

NOTE
The conversational macro (talk macro) is not
synchronized with the auxiliary macro in the
parallel execution mode. When the same macro
variable or macro executor function is to be used,
program the conversational macro (talk macro) and
auxiliary macro so that no competition will occur.

- 46 -
B-63323EN-2/01 4.CONVERSATIONAL MACRO (TALK MACRO) FUNCTION AND AUXILIARY MACRO FUNCTION

NOTE
When the FS15i original specification is selected
using bit 3 of parameter No. 8558 (15I), some
specifications of the macro executor function
change. For details, see Section 9.1, "Compile
Parameters."

When no conversational macro

(talk macro) is executed
The auxiliary macro is repeatedly executed.

NOTE
When no conversational macro (talk macro) is
executed, the auxiliary macro function executes the
auxiliary macro at the specified intervals as many
blocks as the number specified for parameter No.
7045 at a time.
Execution of the auxiliary macro is affected by the
CNC operation processing time because the
auxiliary macro is executed at a level lower than
that of CNC operation processing. For this
reason, the specified intervals are not guaranteed.
If the number of execution blocks in the auxiliary
macro is increased and the processing time
becomes longer, the screen may be displayed
slowly.

• FS15i original specification

NOTE
When the FS15i original specification is selected
using bit 3 of parameter No. 8558 (15I), parameter
No. 7045 is also valid.

NOTE
When the FS15i original specification is selected
using bit 3 of parameter No. 8558 (15I), some
specifications of the macro executor function
change. For details, see Section 9.1, "Compile
Parameters."

- 47 -
4.CONVERSATIONAL MACRO (TALK MACRO) FUNCTION AND AUXILIARY MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

4.3 Execution Control Codes

The following control codes are available for controlling

execution.
These control codes can be specified in conversational macros
(talk macros) and auxiliary macros.
G65: Macro call
M98: Subprogram call
M99: Program end

Macro call (G65)

• Format
G65 Pp <Ll> <argument-specification> ;
p : Program number of a P-CODE macro to be called
l : Repetition count (1 by default)
argument : Data to be passed to the P-CODE macro. (Argument
specifications I and II are available.)

Specify G65 before any argument.

Macro calls can be nested to a depth of ten levels including
only macro calls or to a depth of ten levels including
subprogram calls and macro calls.

Subprogram call (M98)

• Format
M98 Pp <Ll> ;
p : Program number of a P-CODE macro to be called
l : Repetition count (1 by default)

Subprogram calls can be nested to a depth of ten levels

including only subprogram calls or to a depth of ten levels
including subprogram calls and macro calls.

Program end (M99<Pp>)

• Format
M99 <Pp> ;
p: Sequence number of the calling P-CODE macro
(By default, control is returned to the block following the call
command in the calling macro.)

• M99<Pp> command in the conversational macro (talk macro) main program

Always specify M99<Pp> at the end of the main program.

M99<Pp> in the main program is a special command unlike
subprogram end.

- 48 -
B-63323EN-2/01 4.CONVERSATIONAL MACRO (TALK MACRO) FUNCTION AND AUXILIARY MACRO FUNCTION

When M99<Pp> is executed in the main program, execution

of the conversational macro (talk macro) temporarily
terminates. Then, the following processing is performed:

1 Determines whether to terminate the conversational

macro (talk macro) function.
When the conversational macro (talk macro) function is
executed again after terminated, executes the
conversational macro (talk macro) specified by the
control variable for executing a conversational macro
(talk macro) (#8500) from the beginning regardless of
the <Pp> specification.
2 When the value of the control variable for executing a
conversational macro (talk macro) (#8500) is changed,
erases both character and graphic displays, then
executes the new conversational macro (talk macro).
When the value is not changed, repeatedly executes the
same macro without erasing both character and graphic
displays. When <Pp> is specified, starts execution from
the block with the sequence number specified by p.
3 Initializes the local variables to <null>.

• M99<Pp> command in the auxiliary macro main program

Always specify M99<Pp> at the end of the main program.

M99<Pp> in the main program is a special command unlike
subprogram end.
When M99<Pp> is executed in the main program, execution
of the auxiliary macro temporarily terminates. Then, the
following processing is performed:

1 Checks whether the value of the control variable for

executing an auxiliary macro (#8600) is 0. When the
value is 0, places the auxiliary macro function in the
wait state.
When the program number of an auxiliary macro is set
for the control variable for executing an auxiliary macro
(#8600) again, executes the specified auxiliary macro
from the beginning regardless of the <Pp> specification.
2 When the value of the control variable for executing an
auxiliary macro (#8600) is changed, executes the new
auxiliary macro. When the value is not changed,
repeatedly executes the same auxiliary macro. When
<Pp> is specified, starts execution from the block with
the sequence number specified by p.
3 Initializes the local variables to <null>.

- 49 -
4.CONVERSATIONAL MACRO (TALK MACRO) FUNCTION AND AUXILIARY MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

4.4 Execution Control Variables (#8500, #8510, and #8600)

Control variable for executing a conversational macro (talk macro) (#8500)

This control variable sets the main program number of a

conversational macro (talk macro) to be executed.
When the conversational macro (talk macro) function is
executed, the conversational macro (talk macro) with the
value of variable #8500 as the program number is executed.
At power-on, the value of parameter No. 8536 is set for
variable #8500.
When M99<Pp> is executed in the conversational macro (talk
macro) main program, whether the value of variable #8500 is
changed is checked. When the value is changed, both
character and graphic displays are erased, then the new
conversational macro (talk macro) is executed.
Setting variable #8500 to 0 terminates the conversational
macro (talk macro) function after execution of M99<Pp> in
the conversational macro (talk macro) main program, then
displays the screen displayed immediately before execution
of the conversational macro (talk macro) function.

Control variable for starting a conversational macro (talk macro) (#8510)

Setting variable #8510 to 1 executes the conversational

macro (talk macro) function and the conversational macro
(talk macro) set for the control variable for executing a
conversational macro (talk macro) (#8500).
Setting variable #8510 to 0 terminates the conversational
macro (talk macro) function after execution of M99<Pp> in
the conversational macro (talk macro) main program, then
displays the screen immediately before execution of the
conversational macro (talk macro) function.

Control variable for executing an auxiliary macro (#8600)

This control variable sets the main program number of an

auxiliary macro.
At power-on, the value of parameter No. 8537 is set for
variable #8600.
Setting variable #8600 to other than 0 executes the auxiliary
macro with the value of variable #8600 as the program
number.
When M99<Pp> is executed in the auxiliary macro main
program, whether the value of variable #8600 is changed is
checked. When the value is changed, the new auxiliary
macro is executed. When the value is not changed, the same
auxiliary macro is repeatedly executed.

- 50 -
B-63323EN-2/01 4.CONVERSATIONAL MACRO (TALK MACRO) FUNCTION AND AUXILIARY MACRO FUNCTION

Setting variable #8600 to 0 terminates execution of the

auxiliary macro after execution of M99<Pp> in the auxiliary
macro main program.

- 51 -
4.CONVERSATIONAL MACRO (TALK MACRO) FUNCTION AND AUXILIARY MACRO FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

4.5 Fatal Error

An error may occur and execution may not be able to be

continued during execution of a conversational macro (talk
macro) or auxiliary macro. Such an error includes the case
where a P-CODE macro program is not found. In this case,
the screen is forcibly switched to the conversational macro
(talk macro) screen and a message indicating that a fatal
error occurred is displayed.
If such an error occurs during execution of an auxiliary
macro, the control variable for executing an auxiliary macro
(#8600) is preset to 0 and execution of the auxiliary macro is
terminated.

The following items are displayed on the conversational

macro (talk macro) screen:
• Name of the P-CODE macro in which a fatal error
occurred
• Message "ABNORMAL END"
• Error information
a-bbbbbb-ccccc

a : 0: No error occurred.
1: An error occurred in a macro statement command.
2: An error occurred in an NC statement command.
bbbbbb : • Variable number for a macro statement
(0 is displayed for other than a variable.)
• G code for an NC statement
(0 is displayed for other than a G code.)
When no error occurred, 0 is displayed.

- 52 -
B-63323EN-2/01 4.CONVERSATIONAL MACRO (TALK MACRO) FUNCTION AND AUXILIARY MACRO FUNCTION

ccccc : Error number

When no error occurred, 0 is displayed.
For details of the error, see Section 10.1, "Error No.
List."
• Number of the program in which the error occurred
• Sequence number for which the error occurred

Clearing the error information display screen

Error information display can be canceled by pressing

function key POS or PROG and terminating
the conversational macro (talk macro) function.

NOTE
If an error occurs during execution of an auxiliary
macro, the control variable for executing an
auxiliary macro (#8600) is preset to 0. To restart
execution of an auxiliary macro, set the program
number for the control variable for executing an
auxiliary macro (#8600).

- 53 -
5.MACRO VARIABLES B-63323EN-2/01

5 MACRO VARIABLES

- 54 -
B-63323EN-2/01 5.MACRO VARIABLES

5.1 Macro Variable List

The following variables can be used in P-CODE macros.

Conversational
Variable Auxiliary Execution
Type Remarks macro (talk
number macro macro
macro)
#1 to 33 Local variable The local variables used in a ¡ ¡ ¡
conversational macro (talk macro) and
those used in an auxiliary macro are
independent of one another.
The local variables used in an execution
macro can also be used in a custom
macro.
If array variables are effective, no local
variables can be used in conversational
macros (talk macros) and auxiliary
macros.
#1 to 99 Array variable Array variables cannot be used if local ¡ ¡ ×
variables are effective.
(This applies to the array variables in
conversational macros (talk macros) and
auxiliary macros.)
#100 to 199 Volatile common The same volatile common variable can ¡ ¡ ¡
variable be used in any of conversational macros
(talk macros), auxiliary macros, and
execution macros. Using MV0 and MV1
(bits 0 and 1 of parameter No. 8503), it is
possible to specify whether volatile
common variables can also be used as
custom macro common variables or they
are to be used as independent P-CODE
macro common variables.
#200 to 999 Nonvolatile The same nonvolatile common variable ¡ ¡ ¡
common variable can be used in any of conversational
macros (talk macros), auxiliary macros,
and execution macros. Using MV2 to
MVA (bits 2 to 7 of parameter No. 8503
and bits 1 to 3 of parameter No. 8504), it
is possible to specify whether nonvolatile
common variables can also be used as
custom macro common variables or they
are to be used as independent P-CODE
macro common variables.
#1000 to System variable The variables used in custom macros ¡ ¡ ¡
can also be used as system variables.
#30000 to P-CODE variable The same P-CODE variable can be used ¡ ¡ ¡
39999 in any of conversational macros (talk
macros), auxiliary macros, and execution
macros. The upper limit on the variable
number is determined with EV2 (bit 1 of
parameter No. 8509) and parameter No.
8549.

- 55 -
5.MACRO VARIABLES B-63323EN-2/01

#40000 to Extended P- The same extended P-CODE variable ¡ ¡ ¡

99099 CODE variable can be used in any of conversational
macros (talk macros), auxiliary macros,
and execution macros. The upper limit
on the variable number is determined
with EV1 (bit 0 of parameter No. 8509)
and parameter No. 8550.
#99100 to Volatile custom The same variable can be used in any of ¡ ¡ ¡
99199 macro common conversational macros (talk macros),
variable auxiliary macros, and execution macros.
#99200 to Nonvolatile The same variable can be used in any of ¡ ¡ ¡
99999 custom macro conversational macros (talk macros),
common variable auxiliary macros, and execution macros.

- 56 -
B-63323EN-2/01 5.MACRO VARIABLES

5.2 Local Variables (#1 to #33)/Array Variables (#1 to #99)

Local variables can be used in any of conversational macros

(talk macros), auxiliary macros, and execution macros. The
local variables used in an execution macro, those used in a
conversational macro (talk macro), and those used in an
auxiliary macro are independent of one another. The local
variables used in an execution macro can also be used in a
custom macro.

NOTE
If array variables are effective, local variables are
not effective in conversational macros (talk
macros) and auxiliary macros.
In execution macros, local variables are effective
regardless of whether array variables are effective
or not.

If a P-CODE variable is to be referenced by a conversational

macro (talk macro) or auxiliary macro as an array variable,
an array variable (#1 to #99) can be used. See Section 6.9,
"Array-Type Processing and Referencing of P-CODE
Variables" for details.

NOTE
Local variables are effective if array variables are
not effective.

- 57 -
5.MACRO VARIABLES B-63323EN-2/01

5.3 Common Variables (#100 to #199, #200 to #499, and #500

to #999)

Common variables can be used in any of conversational

macros (talk macros), auxiliary macros, and execution
macros, and the same common variable can be used in any of
them. It is possible to specify whether to use common
variables as custom macro common variables or use them as
P-CODE macro common variables, independent of custom
macro common variables. To do this, use MV0 to MVA (bits
0 to 7 of parameter No. 8503 and bits 1 to 3 of parameter No.
8504).

NOTE
If the parameters are set so that variables #200 to
#499 are used as custom macro common
variables, an option for additional 900 custom
macro common variables is required.

By setting variable numbers for the appropriate parameters

in the same way as in custom macros, multiple common
variables (#200 to #499 and #500 to #999) can be protected.
The parameters used for the protection differ depending on
whether P-CODE macro common variables are used or
custom macro common variables are used.

NOTE
Parameters Nos. 8574 to 8577 are for P-CODE
macro common variables.
Parameters Nos. 7036 to 7039 are for custom
macro common variables.

- 58 -
B-63323EN-2/01 5.MACRO VARIABLES

Caution
CAUTION
The same common variable can be used in any of
conversational macros (talk macros), auxiliary
macros, and execution macros, but caution is
necessary. If the common variable used in an
execution macro and a user program is the same
as the common variable used in a conversational
macro (talk macro) and an auxiliary macro, writing
may occur from the execution macro while writing
is performed from the conversational macro (talk
macro) or auxiliary macro because execution
macros have a higher processing level than
conversational macros (talk macros) and auxiliary
macros, with the result that the values written by
the execution macro may be overwritten by the
remaining processing of the conversational macro
(talk macro) or auxiliary macro. For this reason,
make sure that the variables used in execution
macros are different from those used in
conversational macros (talk macros) and auxiliary
macros.

- 59 -
5.MACRO VARIABLES B-63323EN-2/01

5.4 P-CODE Variables (#30000 and Above)

P-CODE variables can be used in P-CODE macros.

P-CODE variables start with #30000, and the number of P-
CODE variables that can be used is determined using the
appropriate parameter.
It is possible to specify whether to use P-CODE variables as
floating-point data variables or integer data variables, using
the appropriate parameter.

Setting
1. Set the variable type for EV2 (bit 1 of parameter No.
8509).
2. Set the number of variables for parameter No. 8549.
The number of variables that can be used is the value set
for this parameter times n, where n differs depending on
the variable type.
Floating-point data : 40
Integer data : 100
The maximum value that can be set for this parameter is
100.
If this parameter is 0, no P-CODE variables can be used.

EXAMPLE
[Setting example]
1. If EV2 (bit 1 of parameter No. 8509) is 0 (floating-
point data):
If parameter No. 8549 is set to 1: #30000 to 30039
If parameter No. 8549 is set to 2: #30000 to 30079
2. If EV2 (bit 1 of parameter No. 8509) is 1 (integer
data):
If parameter No. 8549 is set to 1: #30000 to 30099
If parameter No. 8549 is set to 2: #30000 to 30199

Caution
CAUTION
EV2 (bit 1 of parameter No. 8509) and parameter
No. 8549 cannot be set from the MDI.
The compile parameters set when a P-CODE macro
was created are copied to EV2 and the parameter
when the power is turned on.

- 60 -
B-63323EN-2/01 5.MACRO VARIABLES

• Caution on setting
The maximum value that can be set for parameter No. 8549
is 100. The actual maximum value that can be set, however,
depends on the free space of the backup memory.
The free space of the backup memory can be checked on the
main CPU board module screen on the system configuration
screen.

If one capacity unit of the backup memory is assumed

equivalent to one page, the relationships between the value
set for parameter No. 8549 and the number of pages used are
as follows:
For floating-point data : Parameter No. 8549 times
1.25 pages
For integer data : Parameter No. 8549 times
0.78125 pages
(In either case, the result is rounded up to an integer
number.)

Caution
CAUTION
The free space of the backup memory must not be
exceeded.
Otherwise, "FILE ALLOCATION ERROR" is
displayed when the power is turned on, and the
system stops.
If "FILE ALLOCATION ERROR" is displayed, use
either of the following recovery methods:
<1> Register a P-CODE macro that does not cause
the free space to be exceeded.
<2> Delete the P-CODE macro.

- 61 -
5.MACRO VARIABLES B-63323EN-2/01

CAUTIONS
1 For integer data, a value in the range of -32768 to
+32767 can be set in a variable. If the value has a
fractional part, it is rounded off to the nearest integer
number. A <null> representation is not possible.
If a P-CODE variable of the integer data type
appears in an <expression>, it is converted to
floating-point data before the expression is
evaluated.
2 P-CODE variables retain their values even after the
power is disconnected.
3 When the values of EV2 (bit 1 of parameter No.
8509) and parameter No. 8549 are changed, the
power must be turned off and then on again for the
new values to take effect.
4 P-CODE variables are displayed on the P-CODE
macro variable screen. They can also be entered
from the MDI.

Displaying the free space of the backup memory

The free space of the backup memory can be checked on the
main CPU board module screen on the SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION screen.
(The free space is displayed in the SRAM FREE field in the
figure below.)

- 62 -
B-63323EN-2/01 5.MACRO VARIABLES

5.5 Extended P-CODE Variables (#40000 and Above)

Extended P-CODE variables can be used in P-CODE macros.

Extended P-CODE variables start with #40000, and the
number of extended P-CODE variables that can be used is
determined using the appropriate parameter.
It is possible to specify whether to use extended P-CODE
variables as floating-point data variables or integer data
variables, using the appropriate parameter.

Setting
1. Set the variable type for EV1 (bit 0 of parameter No.
8509).
2. Set the number of variables for parameter No. 8550.
The number of variables that can be used is the value set
for this parameter times n, where n differs depending on
the variable type.
Floating-point data: 10
Integer data: 30
The maximum number that can be set for this
parameter is 1970.
If this parameter is 0, no extended P-CODE variables
can be used.

EXAMPLE
[Setting example]
1. If EV1 (bit 0 of parameter No. 8509) is 0 (floating-
point data):
If parameter No. 8550 is set to 1: #40000 to
#40009
If parameter No. 8550 is set to 2: #40000 to
#40019
2. If EV1 (bit 0 of parameter No. 8509) is 1 (integer
data):
If parameter No. 8550 is set to 1: #40000 to
#40029
If parameter No. 8550 is set to 2: #40000 to
#40059

Caution
CAUTION
EV1 (bit 0 of parameter No. 8509) and parameter
No. 8550 cannot be set from the MDI.
The compile parameters set when a P-CODE macro
was created are copied to EV1 and the parameter
when the power is turned on.

- 63 -
5.MACRO VARIABLES B-63323EN-2/01

• Caution on setting
The maximum value that can be set for parameter No. 8550
is 1970. The actual maximum value that can be set,
however, depends on the free space of the backup memory.
The free space of the backup memory can be checked on the
main CPU board module screen on the system configuration
screen. See "Displaying the free space of the backup
memory" in Section 5.4, "P-CODE Variables (#30000 and
Above)."

If one capacity unit of the backup memory is assumed

equivalent to one page, the relationship between the value
set for parameter No. 8550 and the number of pages used is
as follows:
For floating-point data: Parameter No. 8550 times
0.3125 pages
For integer data : Parameter No. 8550 times
0.234375 pages
(In either case, the result is rounded up to an integer
number.)

Caution
CAUTION
The free space of the backup memory must not be
exceeded.
Otherwise, "FILE ALLOCATION ERROR" is
displayed when the power is turned on, and the
system stops.
If "FILE ALLOCATION ERROR" is displayed, use
either of the following recovery methods:
<1> Register a P-CODE macro that does not cause
the free space to be exceeded.
<2> Delete the P-CODE macro.

- 64 -
B-63323EN-2/01 5.MACRO VARIABLES

CAUTIONS
1 For integer data, a value in the range of -32768 to
+32767 can be set in a variable. If the value has a
fractional part, it is rounded off to the nearest integer
number. A <null> representation is not possible.
If an extended P-CODE variable of the integer data
type appears in an <expression>, it is converted to
floating-point data before the expression is
evaluated.
2 Extended P-CODE variables retain their values even
after the power is turned off.
3 When the values of EV1 (bit 0 of parameter No.
8509) and parameter No. 8550 are changed, the
power must be turned off and on again for the new
values to take effect.
4 Extended P-CODE variables are displayed on the P-
CODE macro variable screen. They can also be
entered from the MDI.

- 65 -
5.MACRO VARIABLES B-63323EN-2/01

5.6 Custom Macro Common Variables (#99100 to #99999)

Using numbers #99100 to #99999, it is possible to write and

read values to and from custom macro common variables
(#100 to #199, #200 to #499, and #500 to #999) from
conversational macros (talk macros), auxiliary macros, and
execution macros.
The number of the variable to be read plus 99000 is the
number to be used.

#99100 corresponds to variable #100.

#99199 corresponds to variable #199.
#99500 corresponds to variable #500.
#99999 corresponds to variable #999.

NOTE
If the option for additional 900 custom macro
common variables is not attached, it is possible to
write and read values from only variables #100 to
#199 and #500 to #999.

- 66 -
B-63323EN-2/01 5.MACRO VARIABLES

5.7 Custom Macro System Variables (#1000 and Above)

All system variables that can be used in the Series15i and

Series150i custom macros can be used in execution macros,
conversational macros (talk macros), and auxiliary macros.
For details of system variables, refer to "FANUC Series
15i/150i-MA Operator's Manual (Programming)" (B-63324EN).

Caution
CAUTION
It is possible to specify system variables #3000,
#3003, #3004, and #3006 from conversational
macros (talk macros) and auxiliary macros. Use
great caution when specifying the variables
because they affect automatic operation.

Displaying an alarm message

using variable #3000
Specifying variable #3000 from a conversational macro (talk
macro) or auxiliary macro places the CNC in the alarm state.
On the alarm message screen, the number of the specified
macro alarm is displayed along with the message. Placing
the CNC in the alarm state causes automatic operation to
stop.
Specifying the variable from an execution macro has the
same effect as specifying it from a user program.

• Caution
CAUTION
Specifying variable #3000 from a conversational
macro (talk macro) or auxiliary macro causes
automatic operation to stop due to an alarm.

Displaying an operator message

using variable #3006
Specifying variable #3006 from a conversational macro (talk
macro) or auxiliary macro causes a message to be displayed
on the external operator message screen and automatic
operation to stop.
Specifying the variable from an execution macro has the
same effect as specifying it from a custom macro program.

• Caution
CAUTION
Specifying variable #3006 from a conversational
macro (talk macro) or auxiliary macro causes
automatic operation to stop.
- 67 -
5.MACRO VARIABLES B-63323EN-2/01

P-CODE macro UI/UO separation function

It is possible to use different signals in P-CODE macros from

those used in user programs, as interface input signals,
which can be read from system variables #1000 to #1015,
#1032, #1110 to #1115, and #1132, and interface output
signals to be sent.
By setting EUI (bit 5 of parameter No. 8502) to 1, the signals
written and read to and from system variables in P-CODE
macros (conversational macros (talk macros), auxiliary
macros, and execution macros) become the above-mentioned
interface signals.

NOTE
Even if this function is used, the UI/UO signals in
user programs (other than P-CODE macros) are
ordinary interface signals.

• Variables #1000 to #1015

and #1032
By reading system variables #1000 to #1015 and #1032, the
states of the input signals for P-CODE macros can be
determined.

• Variables #1100 to #1115

and #1132
By using system variables #1100 to #1115 and #1132, the
output signals for P-CODE macros can be read and written.

• Input signals for P-CODE macros

EUI00 to EUI15 <G144 to G145>

[Classification] Input signal

[Function] The control unit is not provided with any related function.
These signals can be read by a P-CODE macro, as a kind of
system variable, and are used as interfaces between the P-
CODE macro and the PMC. They correspond to system
variables, as follows:

Number of
Signal Variable Value correspondence
signals
EUI00 1 #1000
EUI01 1 #1001
EUI02 1 #1002
"0" corresponds to 0 and "1"
EUI03 1 #1003
to 1.
: : :
EUI14 1 #1014
EUI15 1 #1015
EUI00 to EUI15 16 #1032 16-bit binary code

- 68 -
B-63323EN-2/01 5.MACRO VARIABLES

These system variables cannot be used on the left side of an

assignment statement.

• Output signals for P-CODE macros

EUO00 to EUO15 <F166 to F167>

[Classification] Output signal

[Function] The control unit is not provided with any related function.
These signals can be read and written by a P-CODE macro,
as a kind of system variable, and are used as interfaces
between the P-CODE macro and the PMC. They correspond
to system variables, as follows:

Number of
Signal Variable Value correspondence
signals
EUO00 1 #1100
EUO01 1 #1101
EUO02 1 #1102
"0" corresponds to 0 and "1"
EUO03 1 #1103
to 1.
: : :
EUO14 1 #1114
EUO15 1 #1115
EUO00 to EUO15 16 #1132 16-bit binary code

These system variables can be used on both the right and left
sides of an assignment statement.
When a system variable is used on the right side of an
assignment statement, the value stored (sent) when the
variable was last used on the left side of an assignment
statement is assumed.

• Signal addresses
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G144 EUI07 EUI06 EUI05 EUI04 EUI03 EUI02 EUI01 EUI00

G145 EUI15 EUI14 EUI13 EUI12 EUI11 EUI10 EUI09 EUI08

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F166 EUO07 EUO06 EUO05 EUO04 EUO03 EUO02 EUO01 EUO00

F167 EUO15 EUO14 EUO13 EUO12 EUO11 EUO10 EUO09 EUO08

- 69 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

6 MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

- 70 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

List of Macro Executor Functions, along with Related G Codes and Control Variables

Conversational

Execution
Auxiliary
Section Function Related G code Related control variable

Screen display functions G202, G240, G242 8509, 8530

G243, G244, G280
G301, G302, G303
6.1 ¡ ∆ ×
G230, G390, G391
G392, G311, G300
G320, G204, G321
Key input and data input/output 8501, 8502, 8503,
8504, 8550, 8552,
6.2 ¡ × ×
8540 to 8549
8533

6.3 Address functions ¡ ¡ ¡

6.4 PMC address reading/writing G310 ¡ ¡ ×

Reader/punch interface G330, G331, G335 8537 to 8539

6.5 ¡ ¡ ×
G336 to G339
Referencing and Writing CNC Programs G322, G328, G329 8520 to 8523
6.6 G370, G371 8526 to 8529 ¡ ¡ ×
G375 to G377
6.7 Cutting Time and Distance Read and Preset Functions 8553, 8554 ¡ ¡ ×

6.8 Relative Coordinate Read and Preset Functions G360 8996 to 8999 ¡ ¡ ×

Array-Type Processing and Referencing of P-CODE G315 8511 to 8519

6.9 ¡ ∆ ×
Variables
6.10 Torque Limit Override Control 8990 to 8993 ¡ ¡ ¡

6.11 Reading A/D Conversion Data 8996 to 8999 ¡ ¡ ×

Reading the Distance to Go 5181 to 5200

6.12 ¡ ¡ ¡
100801 to 100824
PMC Axis Control G340, G341, G344 8602
6.13 G345, G346, G348 ¡ ¡ ×
G349, G350, G351
File Control FGEN, FDEL, FOPEN
6.14 FCLOS, FREAD ¡ ¡ ×
FWRIT, FPSET
6.15 Axis-Direction-by-Axis-Direction Interlock Function 8605 to 8608 ¡ ¡ ×

Window Function 8996 to 8999

6.16 8631 to 8645 ¡ ¡ ×
8656 to 8664

6.17 Function for Searching Data Tables for Control Variables G400 8650 to 8655 ¡ ¡ ×

¡: Usable, ∆: Usable in some cases, × : Not usable

- 71 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

NOTES
1 The G codes described in Section 6.1 cannot be
executed with auxiliary macro functions.
2 G315, described in Section 6.9, is a G code that
cannot be executed with auxiliary macro functions.
3 The G codes described in Section 6.13 requires
the PMC axis control option.

Caution
CAUTION
Even those functions that are usable in multiple P-
CODE macros (conversational macros (talk
macros), auxiliary macros, and execution macros)
must not be used simultaneously.

List of control variables

Conversational

Execution
Auxiliary
Variable No. Function Type R/W

Execution macro call masking function

#8690 Execution macro call masking variable 1 Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ¡
(Axis address call masking)
#8691 Execution macro call masking variable 2 Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ¡
(Macro calls and subprogram calls with T
codes)
P-CODE work number search
#8610 Program number Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
Execution control variable
#8500 Conversational macro (talk macro) Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ¡
execution control variable
#8510 Conversational macro (talk macro) Integer /W ¡ ¡ ¡
activation control variable
#8600 Auxiliary macro execution variable Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ¡
Screen display control
#8509 Character string registration program Floating R/W ¡ ¡ ×
variable
#8530 Function screen control variable Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
Graphic state reading
#8800 Graphic state reading variable Integer R/ ¡ × ×
Key input and data input/output
#8501 Command key input variable Integer R/ ¡ × ×
#8502 Data input control variable Floating R/W ¡ × ×
#8503 Numeric data variable Floating R/ ¡ × ×
#8504 Address data variable Floating R/ ¡ × ×
#8550 Character string input Floating R/ ¡ × ×
Extended data input control variable

- 72 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

Conversational

Execution
Auxiliary
Variable No. Function Type R/W

#8552 Variable number setting Floating R/W ¡ × ×

MDI key image reading function
#8540 to #8549 MDI key image reading Integer R/ ¡ × ×
#8533 MDI keyboard type reading Integer R/ ¡ × ×
Reader/punch interface
#8537 Completion code (auxiliary macro Floating R/ ¡ ¡ ×
execution result)
#8538 Completion code (conversational macro Floating R/ ¡ ¡ ×
(talk macro) execution result)
#8539 Completion code (common to auxiliary Floating R/ ¡ ¡ ×
macros and conversational macros (talk
macros))
Referencing and writing CNC programs
#8520 Program number specification Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
#8521 Block number specification Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
#8522 Storage variable number specification Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
#8523 Variable number for specifying the Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
number of decimal places
#8526 Background editing mode status variable Integer R/ ¡ ¡ ×
#8527 Number of registered programs Integer R/ ¡ ¡ ×
#8528 Free-space capacity of CNC program Integer R/ ¡ ¡ ×
memory
#8529 Completion code Integer R/ ¡ ¡ ×
Cutting time and distance read and preset functions
#8553 Reading and presetting the cutting time Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
#8554 Reading and presetting a cutting Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
distance
Relative coordinate read and preset functions
#8996 Completion code Integer R/ ¡ ¡ ×
#8997 Relative coordinate read selection code Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
#8998 Axis number Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
#8999 Relative coordinate data Floating R/ ¡ ¡ ×
Array-type processing and referencing of P-CODE variables
#8511 Source data Floating R/W ¡ ¡ ×
#8512 Source two-dimensional array number Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
#8513 Source three-dimensional array number Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
#8514 Destination two-dimensional array Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
number
#8515 Destination three-dimensional array Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
number
#8516 Number of one-dimensional array Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
elements
#8517 Number of two-dimensional array Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
elements
#8518 (1 whenever used) Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
#8519 Array start variable number Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
Torque limit override control

- 73 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Conversational

Execution
Auxiliary
Variable No. Function Type R/W

#8990 Read/write selection Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ¡

#8991 Axis number Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ¡
#8992 Torque limit override value Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ¡
#8993 Completion code Floating R/ ¡ ¡ ¡
Reading A/D conversion data
#8996 Completion code Integer R/ ¡ ¡ ×
#8997 A/D converter selection code Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
#8998 Connector number Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
#8999 A/D converter data Floating R/ ¡ ¡ ×
#8631 to #8645 A/D data (first axis to fifteenth axis) Floating R/ ¡ ¡ ×
#8656 to #8664 A/D data (sixteenth axis to twenty-fourth
axis)
Reading the distance to go
#5181 (first axis) to Reading a distance to go for each axis Integer R/ ¡ ¡ ×
#5200 (twentieth
axis)
#100801 (first axis) to
#100824 (twenty-
fourth axis)
PMC axis control
#8602 PMC controlled axis selection Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
Axis-direction-by-axis-direction interlock function
#8605 (first to Axis-direction-by-axis-direction interlock Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
sixteenth axes) control variables
#8607 (seventeenth
to twenty-fourth
axes)
#8606 (first to Movement axis and direction variables Integer R/ ¡ ¡ ×
sixteenth axes) for the rise time of the SKIP signal
#8608 (seventeenth
to twenty-fourth
axes)
Window function
#8996 Completion code Integer R/ ¡ ¡ ×
#8997 Alarm information selection code Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
#8998 Axis number Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
#8999 Alarm information Floating R/ ¡ ¡ ×
Function for searching data tables for control variables
#8650 Start macro variable number in the Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
search target data table (for READ)
Start macro variable number in the set
next to the retrieved data table set
number (#8655) (for WRITE)
#8651 The number of macro variables forming a Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×
set in the data table

- 74 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

Conversational

Execution
Auxiliary
Variable No. Function Type R/W

#8652 The number of search target data table Integer R/W ¡ ¡ ×

sets (for READ)
Set value minus the number of sets that
have already been retrieved (for WRITE)
#8653 Lower limit to the search value Floating R/W ¡ ¡ ×
#8654 Upper limit to the search value Floating R/W ¡ ¡ ×
#8655 The data table set number where a Integer R/ ¡ ¡ ×
control variable that satisfies the search
condition is contained

NOTE
The variable types are as follows:
Floating: Floating-point type
Integer : Integer type
When an attempt is made to input a <null> value to
a variable of the integer type, the value is changed
to zero before being input.

- 75 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

6.1 Screen Display Functions

6.1.1 Screen coordinate system

Explanation of the system

display section
The screen contains 30 lines. Of these lines, the uppermost
three lines are used by the system only. Thus, the lower 27
lines can be used for replacement by conversational macros
(talk macros).
In the system display section, the first line displays the title,
date and time, program number, and sequence number and
the second line displays the status.
In the lines where replacement can be performed by
conversational macros (talk macros), there is a data input
line and a soft key frame.

Character coordinate system

The coordinate system that a conversational macro (talk
macro) function uses to display characters as well as the
cursor is called the character coordinate system. In the
character coordinate system, the horizontal axis is assumed
to be the X-axis, while the vertical axis is assumed to be the
Y-axis. The X coordinates are in the range of 0 to 73 from
left to right (0 to 79 if 15I (bit 3 of parameter No. 8558) is 1),
while the Y coordinates are in the range of 0 to 26 from top to
bottom.
Any display commands exceeding these ranges are ignored.
One unit is one character.
The following portions cannot be used because they are used
by the system:
22nd line (data input line) (23rd line if 15I (bit 3 of parameter
No. 8558 is 1) and the soft key frame on the 24th, 25th, and
26th lines.

NOTE
When the FS15i original specifications are
selected with 15I (bit 3 of parameter No. 8558), the
specifications of several macro executor functions
are changed. See Section 9.1, "Compile
Parameters" for details.

- 76 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

• For 74-character display (15I (bit 3 of parameter No. 8558) is 0)

• For 80-character display (15I (bit 3 of parameter No. 8558) is 1)

- 77 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Graphic coordinate system

The coordinate system that a conversational macro (talk
macro) function uses to display graphics is called the graphic
coordinate system.
In the graphic coordinate system, the horizontal axis is
assumed to be the X-axis, while the vertical axis is assumed
to be the Y-axis.
The X coordinates are in the range of -320 to 319 from left to
right, while the Y coordinates are in the range of -216 to 231
from bottom to top. Thus, the center of the screen is located
near (0, 0).
In 74-character display, the X coordinates in the graphic
coordinate system that correspond to character-displayable
positions are in the range of -296 to 295 from left to right,
while the corresponding Y coordinates are in the range of -
216 to 215 from bottom to top. This series is, therefore,
compatible with the FANUC Series 15B.
Display commands exceeding the range of -32767 to 32767
are clamped to the minimum and maximum. One unit is
one dot.

- 78 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

Differences from the FS15-B

Function FS15-B FS15i
Character • 27 display lines. The • Of the 30 display lines, the
screen top line used by the lower 27 lines are usable by
system and the status conversational macros (talk
display line cannot be macros).
used. • In the horizontal direction,
• 74-character display switchable between 74-
only character display and 80-
character display, using the
appropriate parameter.
Graphic screen • 592 × 432 dots • 640 × 448 dots. (For 74-
character display, the
FS15i is compatible with
the 15B)
O and N • No ON display when • Does not provide the
number display ONMK (bit 4 of function.
mask parameter No. 8508) is
1.
Status display • No status display when • Does not provide the
mask STDM (bit 3 of function.
parameter No. 8507) is
1.

6.1.2 Screen display control codes

The following lists the screen display control codes. The

meanings of the control codes and addresses differ from those
of the control codes and addresses of ordinary NC
statements.

G202 : Screen clear

G240 : Color specification
G242 : Drawing start point setting
G243 : Character display
G244 : Drawing line type specification
G280 : Prompt statement display
G301 : Linear drawing
G302 : Circular drawing (clockwise)
G303 : Circular drawing (counterclockwise)
G230 : Cursor display
G390 : Absolute mode specification
G391 : Incremental mode specification
G392 : Graphic coordinate system setting
G311 : Rapid traverse rate specification
G300 : Rapid traverse drawing
G320 : Closed area filling
G204 : Rectangular display
G321 : Marking

- 79 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

G202, G240, G242, G244, G280, G230, G392, G311, G300,

G320, G204, and G321 are one-shot G codes.
G243, G301, G302, and G303 are modal G codes, and are
interpreted to belong to the same G code group.
G390 and G391 are also modal G code, but belong to a
different G code group from the above modal G code group.

NOTE
If a character card is used as a display unit, G242,
G244, G301, G302, G303, G392, G311, G300,
G320, G204, and G321 cannot be used.

Modal addresses and their

meanings
X : X coordinate in the character coordinate system, X
coordinate of the drawing end point in the graphic
coordinate system, speed ratio X of rapid traverse
drawing
Y : Y coordinate in the character coordinate system, Y
coordinate of the drawing end point in the graphic
coordinate system, speed ratio Y of rapid traverse
drawing
I : X coordinate of the center of circular drawing in the
graphic coordinate system, X coordinate of a diagonal
point in rectangular display
J : Y coordinate of the center of circular drawing in the
graphic coordinate system, Y coordinate of a diagonal
point in rectangular display
A : Character size (character display)
B : Blinking specification (character display)
F : Format for numeric value display (character display)
Z : Zero suppression specification for numeric value
display (character display)

NOTE
Addresses X and Y are used as modal addresses
common to character display and graphic display.

- 80 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

One-shot addresses and their

meanings
D : Numeric value to be displayed
K : Number of spaces to be displayed
C : Character code
P : Sequence number, screen specification, attribute
specification, drawing line type specification
M: Mark number (marking)
L : Cursor length (cursor display), blinking specification
(character display)
Q : Number of the program containing a character string
(character display)

NOTE
During a macro call, none of the addresses is
processed; they are treated as arguments.

6.1.2.1 Screen clear (G202)

This code clears either the graphic screen or character screen

(or both) according to the specification of address P.

Format
G202 Pp ;
P = 1: Clears the graphic screen.
= 2: Clears the character screen.
= 3: Clears both the graphic and character screens.

- 81 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

NOTES
1 When address P is omitted, P3 is assumed, so that
both the graphic and character screens are
cleared.
2 If the display unit is a character card, only P2 and
P3 are effective.
3 Clearing the character screen causes the following
items to be initialized:
Display position : Initialized to (0, 0).
Color : Initialized to white
(high luminance for a
monochrome LCD).
Blinking : Initialized to the off
state.
Display in reverse video : Initialized to the off
state.
Cursor : Initialized to the off
state.
Character size : Initialized to the
standard size.
4 Clearing the graphic screen causes the following
items to be initialized:
Display position: Initialized to (0, 0).
Color : Initialized to white (high
luminance for a monochrome
LCD).
Line type : Initialized to solid.
5 Clearing both the character and graphic screens
causes both the items listed in 3 and 4 above to be
initialized.

6.1.2.2 Color specification (G240)

This code specifies the color of line segments and character

strings.
Format
G240 Pp (L1);
P=0 : Black
=1 : Red
=2 : Green
=3 : Yellow
=4 : Blue
=5 : Purple
=6 : Light blue
=7 : White
=8 : Dark gray

- 82 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

= 9 : Dark green
= 10 : Dark blue
= 11 : Dark purple
= 12 : Bright gray
= -1 : Red (reverse video)
= -2 : Green (reverse video)
= -3 : Yellow (reverse video)
= -4 : Blue (reverse video)
= -5 : Purple (reverse video)
= -6 : Light blue (reverse video)
= -7 : White (reverse video)
= -8 : Dark gray (reverse video)
= -9 : Dark green (reverse video)
= -10 : Dark blue (reverse video)
= -11 : Dark purple (reverse video)
= -12 : Bright gray (reverse video)
L1 : Blinking ON (blinking OFF when L1 is not
specified)

The line segments and character strings specified after this

command are displayed in the color specified for P.

NOTES
1 P7 is assumed until G240 is issued for the first
time.
2 If the display unit is a character card, the luminance
cannot be changed.
Address P is classified into three types:
P = 1 to 12 : Display ON
P=0 : Display OFF
P = -1 to -12 : Display in reverse video ON
3 If the display unit is a monochrome LCD, the
luminance will be as described below:
In the descending order of luminance, the values of
address P are 7, 3, 12, 6, 2, 5, 1, 4, 8, 9, 11, 10,
and 0. (The luminance of 2 is equal to that of 5
and the luminance of 9 is equal to that of 11.)
Because, however, the differences in luminance
are hard to distinguish, it is recommended that only
7 and 2 be used.

- 83 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

6.1.2.3 Drawing start point setting (G242)

This code allows specification of the drawing start point in

the graphic coordinate system, using addresses X and Y.
The next drawing starts at that point.
Format
G242 Xx Yy ;
X: X coordinate of the drawing start point
Y: Y coordinate of the drawing start point

NOTE
The values specified for addresses X and Y are
switched between absolute and incremental values
by using G390 and G391.

6.1.2.4 Character display (G243)

This code displays characters.

Format
G243 Xx Yy Aa Bb Cc Kk Ff.e Dd Zz
Pp Qq
( __ ) ( ' __ ') (*__*) ;

• Addresses X and Y
Addresses X and Y are used to specify the display position of
the character string in the character coordinate system.
X: X coordinate of the display position of the character
string
Y: Y coordinate of the display position of the character
string

NOTES
1 When specifying both X and Y, specify them in
succession.
2 The values specified for addresses X and Y are
switched between absolute and incremental values
by using G390 and G391.

• Address A
Address A specifies the character size.
A = 1: Standard size
= 2: Double size
= 3: Triple size

- 84 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

The double size is effective to alphanumeric characters only,

and causes them to be displayed with the same size as
Chinese characters. It is not effective to the characters and
symbols given in the Chinese and hiragana code table.
The triple size is three times wider and two times higher
than the standard size. The characters that can be
displayed with the triple size are the alphabetic characters,
digits, the minus sign, and the decimal point. No other
characters can be displayed with the triple size.

• Address B
Address B specifies blinking control.
B = 0: Does not blink the character string.
= 1: Blinks the character string.

NOTE
Specifying B1 causes all the subsequent character
strings to blink.

• Address K
Address K specifies the number of spaces. The specified
number of spaces are displayed.
K: Specification of the number of spaces
When spaces are displayed, the affected coordinates are
updated.

• Address C
Address C is used to directly specify the character codes to be
displayed. The codes that can be specified are 32 to 95 (20
to 5F in hexadecimal) and 160 to 223 (A0 to DF in
hexadecimal).
Do not attempt to display codes other than those that can be
specified.
C: Direct specification of the character code to be
displayed

EXAMPLE
G243 C65 ;
"A" is displayed.

NOTE
Use ASCII codes.

- 85 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

• Address P
• Address Q
Address P specifies the number of the sequence containing a
character string.
Address Q specifies the number of the program containing a
character string.
When address Q is not specified, the character string in the
single block determined with the sequence number specified
for P in the program set in the character string registration
program control variable (#8509) is displayed.
If the value of variable #8509 is 0, the character string in the
single block determined with the sequence number specified
in the same program is displayed.
When address Q is specified, the character string in the
single block determined with the sequence number specified
for P in the program set for address Q is displayed.
P: Specification of the number of the sequence containing
a character string
Q: Specification of the number of the program containing
a character string

EXAMPLE
O9000 ; O8000 ;

#8509 8000 ; N10(IJK) ;

G243(ABC)P20 ; N20(XYZ) ;

M99 ; M99 ;

O9100 ; O8100 ;

#8509=8000 ; N20 (OPQ)

G243 (DEF) P30 Q8100 ; N30 (LMN) ;

M99 ; M99 ;

In the above example, when O9000 is executed, the character

string in the single block with the sequence number 20 of
program No. 8000 is displayed. Thus, "ABCXYZ" is
displayed.
When O9100 is executed, the character string in the single
block with the sequence number 30 of program No. 8100 is
displayed. Thus, "DEFLMN" is displayed.

- 86 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

• Address D
Address D specifies the numeric value to be displayed:
D: Specification of the numeric value to be displayed
The number of significant digits of the value that can be
specified directly for address D is 9.
The number of display significant digits for address D is,
however, 12, so that values in the range of -999999999999 to
-0.000000001, 0, and 0.000000001 to 999999999999 can be
displayed. The number of decimal places can be up to 9.

• Address F
Address F specifies the format in which a numeric value is to
be displayed. To the left side of the decimal point, specify
the number of digits of the numeric value to be displayed; to
the right side, specify the number of decimal places.
F: Specification of the format in which a numeric value is
to be displayed
The valid range of address F is 1.0 to 40.9. The decimal
places to be specified to the right side of the decimal point
must be a single digit of 0 to 9. Note that the number of
display digits varies with the specified value and the value of
address Z.

• Address Z
Address Z specifies whether to suppress leading zeros when a
numeric value is displayed. When Z is equal to 0, the sign is
not displayed.
Z = 0: Does not suppress leading zeros.
= 1: Suppresses leading zeros.

EXAMPLES
1 G243 D-123.4567 F8.3 Z1;
"∆∆-123.457" is displayed. (10-character display)
2 G243 D-123.4567 F8.3 Z0;
"00123.457" is display. (9-character display)
3 G243 D-123.4567 F8.0 Z1;
"∆∆∆∆-123" is displayed. (9-character display)
4 G243 D-123.4567 F8.0 Z0;
"00000123" is displayed. (8-character display)
(∆ represents a space.)

- 87 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

NOTE
The number of digits of the integer part, which is
equal to the number of display digits minus the
number of decimal places, both specified for
address F, must be equal to or greater than the
number of digits of the integer part of the numeric
value specified for address D. Otherwise, the
numeric value is not displayed correctly.

• ( __ )
( and ) are used to directly specify the character string to be
displayed. The characters that can be enclosed in ( and ) are
the alphabetic characters (uppercase only), digits, the minus
sign, the decimal point, and spaces.

EXAMPLE
G243(FANUC);
"FANUC" is displayed.

• ( '__' )
(' and ') are used to specify the character string (of single- and
double-byte characters) to be displayed. The characters
that can be enclosed in (' and ') are the characters given in
the Katakana Code Table and the Chinese and Hiragana
Code Table in Section 10.3 in Chapter 10.
Hiragana and Chinese characters each take a space twice
wider than a single-byte character.

EXAMPLE
G243('Fanuc NC ');;
"Fanuc NC " is displayed.

• (*__*)
(* and *) are used to specify the internal codes corresponding
to the character string to be displayed. The character codes
must be specified in hexadecimal.
The codes must be delimited by a space. Hiragana and
Kanji characters each take a space twice wider than a
single-byte character.

EXAMPLE
G243(*46 41 4E 55 43 20*);
G243(*4E 43 4175 4356*)
"Fanuc NC " is displayed.

- 88 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

NOTE
Use the JIS codes (codes given in the Katakana
Code Table and the Chinese and Hiragana Code
Table in Section 10.3 in Chapter 10).

• Limitation
NOTES
1 Character strings are displayed in the order in
which they are specified.
2 The same address cannot be specified twice.
3 F, Z, and Z become effective first.
4 Up to five character strings enclosed in any of
( and ), (' and '), and (* and *) can be specified in a
single block, in total.
5 Up to 255 characters can be specified in a single
block, in total.

6.1.2.5 Drawing line type specification (G244)

This code specifies the type of the line segment to be drawn

by linear or circular drawing.

Format
G244 Pp ;
P = 0: Solid line
= 1: Broken line
= 2: Alternate long and short dash line
= 3: Alternate long and two short dashes line
= 4: Erasure
= 5: Dotted line

NOTES
1 This code is not effective if the display unit is a
character card.
2 Solid line is automatically assumed when the
graphic screen clear code (G202) is issued.

- 89 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

6.1.2.6 Prompt statement display (G280)

A prompt statement is a statement that prompts input. In

character string input mode (data input control variable
#8502 is equal to 3), a prompt statement of up to 39
characters can be displayed on the data input line.
The character string can be specified in the same way as with
G243.

Format
G280 Cc Kk Pp Qq ( __ ) ( '__' ) (*__*);
C : Character code. (See the explanation of G243.)
K : Number of spaces. (See the explanation of
G243.)
P : Number of the sequence containing a character
string. (See the explanation of G243.)
Q : Number of the program containing a character
string. (See the explanation of G243.)
( __ ) : Character string to be displayed. (See the
explanation of G243)
( '__' ) : Character string to be displayed. (See the
explanation of G243)
(*__*): Character string to be displayed. (See the
explanation of G243)

NOTES
1 G280 is a one-shot G code, which means that the
code is effective only in the block in which it is
specified.
2 If a prompt statement is displayed with multiple
addresses, a single space is automatically inserted
between the character string displayed with one
address and that displayed with another.

6.1.2.7 Linear drawing (G301)

This code draws a straight line up to the specified X and Y

coordinates, with the line type specified with G244 and the
color specified with G240.

Format
G301 Xx Yy ;
X: X coordinate of the end point of linear drawing
Y: Y coordinate of the end point of linear drawing

- 90 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

NOTES
1 This code is not effective if the display unit is a
character card.
2 The values specified for addresses X and Y are
switched between absolute and incremental values
by using G390 and G391.

6.1.2.8 Circular drawing (clockwise) (G302)

6.1.2.9 Circular drawing (counterclockwise) (G303)

This code draws an arc up to the end point specified with X

and Y coordinates, using the vector specified for I and J
that starts at the center of the arc.
G302 draws an arc clockwise.
G303 draws an arc counterclockwise.

Format
G302 Xx Yy Ii Jj ;
G303 Xx Yy Ii Jj ;
X : X coordinate of the end point of circular drawing
Y : Y coordinate of the end point of circular drawing
I : X component of the vector that is directed from the
start point of the arc to the center of the arc
J : Y component of the vector that is directed from the
start point of the arc to the center of the arc

NOTES
1 These codes are not effective if the display unit is a
character card.
2 The values specified for addresses X and Y are
switched between absolute and incremental values
by using G390 and G391.

- 91 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Circular drawing program example

EXAMPLE
G390 G242 X0 Y0 ;
G391 G301 X200 ;
G302 X-200 I-100 ;
G303 X-200 I-100 ;
G301 X200 ;

When the above program is executed, the following is drawn

in the graphic coordinate system.

6.1.2.10 Cursor display (G230)

This code displays the character cursor yellow in reverse
video.

Format
G230 Xx Yy Ll ;
Addresses X and Y specify the display position of the cursor
in the character coordinate system.
X: X coordinate of the cursor display position
Y: Y coordinate of the cursor display position
Address L specifies the length of the cursor.
L: Specification of the cursor length

- 92 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

NOTES
1 The cursor is erased when the cursor length is set
to 0.
2 The cursor can also be erased by the character
screen clear code (G202).
3 The values specified for addresses X and Y are
switched between absolute and incremental values
by using G390 and G391.

6.1.2.11 Absolute mode (G390)/incremental mode (G391) specification

These codes respectively specify that the coordinate
command in the character or graphic coordinate system is an
absolute mode command (G390) and incremental mode
command (G391).

NOTE
These codes are effective to G204, G230, G242,
G243, G300, G301, G302, G303, G320, and G321.

6.1.2.12 Graphic coordinate system setting (G392)

This code sets the current position to a specified position in
the graphic coordinate system. The subsequent drawing
commands are executed in this coordinate system.

Format
G392 Xx Yy ;
X: X coordinate
Y: Y coordinate

- 93 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

EXAMPLE
N01 G242 X100 Y100 ;
N02 G392 X60 Y60 ;
N03 G301 X100 ;

When the above

program is executed,
the position (100, 100)
assumed in N01 100 60 N01(100,100)
changes to (60, 60) in N02(60,60) N03(100,60)
N02, and linear
drawing is performed
from (60, 60) to (100,
40 0
60) in N03.
0 60
As a result, the origin 0
position shifts by (40, 0 40 100
40).

NOTES
1 The specified X and Y coordinates are always
assumed absolute.
2 This code is not effective if the display unit is a
character card.

6.1.2.13 Rapid traverse rate specification (G311)

This code specifies the X- and Y-axis speed ratios assumed
during rapid traverse drawing.

Format
G311 Xx Yy ;
Specify the speed ratios assumed during rapid traverse
drawing.
X: Rapid traverse drawing speed ratio in the X axis
Y: Rapid traverse drawing speed ratio in the Y axis

NOTES
1 The rapid traverse drawing speed ratios must be
positive integer numbers in the range of 1 to
32767.
2 The specified X and Y values are always assumed
absolute.
3 This code is not effective if the display unit is a
character card.

- 94 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

6.1.2.14 Rapid traverse drawing (G300)

This code performs drawing with rapid traverse from the
current position to a specified point. The path is
determined with the rapid traverse rate specification.

Format
G300 Xx Yy ;
X: X coordinate for rapid traverse drawing
Y: Y coordinate for rapid traverse drawing

NOTES
1 The values specified for addresses X and Y are
switched between absolute and incremental values
by using G390 and G391.
2 Non-linear drawing is always performed regardless
of the CNC parameters.
3 This code is not effective if the display unit is a
character card.

Rapid traverse drawing program example

EXAMPLE
G311 X200 Y100 ;
G242 X-150 Y-150 ;
G300 X150 Y150 ;

When the above program is executed, drawing is performed

in the graphic coordinate system as shown below.

- 95 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

6.1.2.15 Closed area filling (G320)

This code fills the closed area containing the position
specified for X and Y with the color specified for P.

Format
G320 Xx Yy Pp ;
X: X coordinate of the position contained in the area to
be filled
Y: Y coordinate of the position contained in the area to
be filled
P: Color with which the area is to be filled

- 96 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

NOTES
1 The filling color specified with G320 must be the
same as the boundary color (color of the boundary
of the closed area).
2 G240 Pp;
G320 Xx Yy Pp;
By setting the values of P to 0 with the above
codes, it is possible to fill graphics with "black"
(hide the graphics).

(Example)
G240 P4 ;
G242 X0 Y0 ;
G390 G301 X200 ;
Y100 ;
X0 ; Blue
Y0 ;
G320 X15 Y5 P4 ;
⇓

G240 P0 ;
G242 X0 Y0 ;
G390 G301 X200 ;
Y100 ; Black
X0 ;
Y0 ;
G320 X15 Y5 P0 ;
3 This code is not effective if the display unit is a
character card.
4 The values specified for addresses X and Y are
switched between absolute and incremental values
by using G390 and G391.

6.1.2.16 Rectangular display (G204)

This code fills the rectangle having points (X, Y) and (I, J) as
diagonal points with the color specified for P, and fills the
edge of the outer frame with the color specified with G240.

- 97 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Format
G204 Xx Yy Ii Jj Pp ;
X: X coordinate of the rectangular display start
position
Y: Y coordinate of the rectangular display start
position
I: X coordinate of the rectangular display end position
J: X coordinate of the rectangular display end position
P: Color with which the rectangle is to be filled

NOTES
1 The values specified for addresses X, Y, I, and J
are switched between absolute and incremental
values by using G390 and G391.
2 When P is omitted, the rectangle is not filled, and
the edge of the outer frame is filled with the color
specified with G240.
3 This code is not effective if the display unit is a
character card.

6.1.2.17 Marking (G321)

This code draws the mark specified for M with the color
specified for P at the position specified for X and Y (graphic
coordinates).

Format
G321 Xx Yy Mm Pp ;
X: X coordinate of the position at which a mark is to be
displayed
Y: Y coordinate of the position at which a mark is to be
displayed
M: Specification of the number of the mark to be
displayed
P: Specification of the color of the mark to be displayed

- 98 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

The available marks are shown below as dot patterns,

together with the mark numbers.

Mark number 1 2 3 4
Arrow head Arrow head Arrow head
Mark Origin mark pointing pointing pointing to the
upward downward left
00000 0 0 0
0 0000 0 0 0
0 00000 * 0 0 0
0 00000 0 0 * *
0000**0000 0 0 0
0000 0 0 0 0
0000 0 0
000 0
00000
Mark number 5 6 7 8
Arrow head Arrow head Arrow head Arrow head
Mark pointing to the pointing to the pointing to the pointing to the
right upper left lower left upper right

0
0
0
* *OOO 0 OOO *
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 *OOO 0

Mark number 9 10
Arrow head
Black, round
Mark pointing to the
mark
lower right

000
00000
0 0000000
0 000*
*000
0 0000000
OOO * 00000
000

NOTES
1 The asterisk "*" indicates the position specified for
X and Y.
2 The values specified for addresses X and Y are
switched between absolute and incremental values
by using G390 and G391.
3 This code is not effective if the display unit is a
character card.
4 When address P is omitted, the mark is displayed
white.
5 When addresses X and Y are omitted, the mark is
displayed at the current position.

- 99 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

6.1.2.18 Shift function for graphic screen adjustment

This function allows shifting of the origin of the graphic
coordinate system on the TALK MACRO screen in units of
dots by using parameters Nos. 8570 and 8571.
The X coordinate of the current origin of the graphic
coordinate system is changed to the coordinate specified for
parameter No. 8570. The Y coordinate of the current origin
of the graphic coordinate system is changed to the coordinate
specified for parameter No. 8571.

NOTE
This function is not effective if the display unit is a
character card.

6.1.2.19 Reading of the graphic state

By reading graphic state reading variable #8800, it can be
determined whether the use of graphics is possible in
conversational macros (talk macros).
#8800 = 0: The use of graphics is possible in
conversational macros (talk macros).
#8800 = 1: The use of graphics is not possible in
conversational macros (talk macros).

NOTE
If the display unit is a character card, the use of
graphics is not possible and, therefore, graphic
state reading variable #8800 is always 1 when it is
read.

- 100 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

6.1.2.20 Differences from the FS15-B

Function FS15-B FS15i
Color • P = -7 to 7 • P = -12 to 12
specification
(G240)
Character display • Number of display • Number of display
Address D significant digits: 9 significant digits: 12
Character string • (_) and (*_*) are • (_), ('_'), and (*_*) are
display possible, where _ possible.
Parentheses represents a character • (_*_*_) is not possible,
string. but can be replaced by a
• (_*_*_) is also possible. simpler description ('_').
Drawing line type • P = 0 to 4 • P = 0 to 5 (dotted line
specification added)
Prompt statement • Pp (_) and (*_*) are • Cc, Kk, Pp, Qq, (_), ('_'),
display possible. and (*_*) are possible.

6.1.3 Character string registration program number specification

(#8509)

Variable #8509 is the control variable for specifying the

program in which a character string is registered. See the
explanation of address P of G243 in Section 6.1.2.4,
"Character display" for details.

6.1.4 Function screen control function (#8530)

Variable #8530 can be used to determine which function

screen is currently displayed on the CNC screen.
In addition, variable #8530 can be used to switch the CNC
screen to the desired function screen by writing the
corresponding value to the variable.

#8530 : = 0 Position screen

: = 1 Program screen
: = 2 Offset setting screen
: = 3 Not used
: = 4 Not used
: = 5 System screen
: = 6 Alarm message screen
: = 7 Graphic screen
: = 8 Conversational macro (talk macro) screen
: = 11 Not used

- 101 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

NOTE
The graphic screen requires an option.

Differences from the FS15-B

#8530 FS15-B FS15i

3 Program check screen Not used
4 Setting screen Not used
11 Operation history screen Not used

- 102 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

6.2 Key Input and Data Input/Output

6.2.1 Command key input variable (#8501)

Command key input can be read from variable #8501.

If there is no command key input, the value of variable #8501
is 0.
Once there is command key input, variable #8501 retains its
value, not accepting any subsequent command key input
until it is read by a command.
When read by a command, variable #8501 becomes ready to
accept command key input and changes its value to 0. It is
not possible to write a value to variable #8501.
The command keys are given below, together with the
corresponding values of variable #8501.

PAGE
Page key 1 SOFT FUNCTION KEY 1 12

Page key PAGE

2 SOFT FUNCTION KEY 2 13

Cursor key 3 SOFT FUNCTION KEY 3 14

Cursor key 4 SOFT FUNCTION KEY 4 15

Cursor key 5 SOFT FUNCTION KEY 5 16

Cursor key 6 SOFT FUNCTION KEY 6 17

Input key INPUT 8 SOFT FUNCTION KEY 7 18

Reset key RESET 10 SOFT FUNCTION KEY 8 19

SOFT FUNCTION KEY RIGHT 11 SOFT FUNCTION KEY 9 20

SOFT FUNCTION KEY 10 21

- 103 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

The arrangement and names of the soft function keys are as

follows:

(0) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)

(0) : Function menu key (6) : SOFT FUNCTION KEY6

(1) : SOFT FUNCTION KEY1 (7) : SOFT FUNCTION KEY7
(2) : SOFT FUNCTION KEY2 (8) : SOFT FUNCTION KEY8
(3) : SOFT FUNCTION KEY3 (9) : SOFT FUNCTION KEY9
(4) : SOFT FUNCTION KEY4 (10) : SOFT FUNCTION KEY10
(5) : SOFT FUNCTION KEY5 (11) : SOFT FUNCTION KEY
RIGHT

By setting ECK (bit 0 of parameter 8504) to 1, the command

keys that can be read can be extended.
The additional command keys that can be read are as
follows:

Function menu key 22 Function key 27

Function key 23 Function key 28

Function key 24 Function key 29

Function key 25 Function key 30

Function key 26

Caution
CAUTION
If extension is performed, pressing any of the
above command keys does not cause the system
to switch to the corresponding screen because the
conversational macro (talk macro) function does
not end. It is necessary to set the conversational
macro (talk macro) start control variable (#8510) to
0 in the conversational macro (talk macro) to be
created to terminate the conversational macro (talk
macro) function.

- 104 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

FS15i original specifications

By selecting the FS15i original specifications with 15I (bit 3
of parameter No. 8558), the following command keys can be
read.

INSERT key 31 DELETE key 33

ALTER key 32

NOTE
When the FS15i original specifications are
selected with 15I (bit 3 of parameter No. 8558), the
specifications of several macro executor functions
are changed. See Section 9.1, "Compile
Parameters" for details.

6.2.2 Data input control variable (#8502)

#8502: Data input control variable

#8503: Numeric data variable
#8504: Address data variable
#8550: Character string variable
By setting the following values in data input control variable
#8502, the input of numeric data, address data, and
character string is controlled.
#8502 = 0: No data input
= 1: Input of numeric data
= 2: Input of address data and numeric data
= 3: Input of character strings
(1) No data input (#8502 = 0)
Nothing is displayed on the data input line, and no data
can be input.
(2) Input of numeric data (#8502 = 1)
"VALUE >" is displayed on the data input line, and
numeric data can be input.
The input numeric data can be read from numeric data
variable #8503.
(3) Input of address data and numeric data (#8502 = 2)
"ADDRESS >" is displayed first on the data input line,
and address data can be input. When address data is
input, "ADDRESS ? VALUE >" (where ? is the input
address data) is displayed, and numeric data can be
input.
The input address data and numeric data can be read
from address data variable #8504 and numeric data
variable #8503, respectively.
- 105 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

The addresses that can be input and their corresponding

values of variable #8504 are given below.
A : 1 B : 2 C : 3 D : 4 E : 5 F : 6
G : 7 H : 8 I : 9 J : 10 K : 11 L : 12
M : 13 N : 14 O : 15 P : 16 Q : 17 R : 18
S : 19 T : 20 U : 21 V : 22 W : 23 X : 24
Y : 25 Z : 26
(4) Input of character strings (#8502 = 3)
Nothing is displayed on the data input line, but
character data can be input. The input characters can
be read from character string variable #8550 in the order
in which they are input. The data that can be read is
ASCII codes. After the last character is read, <null> is
read. The maximum allowable number of characters in
a character string is 73.
A prompt statement can be displayed on the data input
line, using the G280 command.

When a command key that causes command key input

variable #8501 to be set to a non-zero value is input, the data
input line returns to its initial state. Then, the input
numeric data, address data, and character data can be read
from the numeric data variable, address data variable, and
character string variable, respectively. When neither
numeric data or address data is input, the values of variables
#8503 and #8504 are <null>. The numeric data variable
and the address data variable retain their values until input
is made again.

6.2.3 Extended data input control variable #8552

By setting 3 in variable #8502 and setting a variable number

in variable #8552, the system enters full key data input mode,
allowing input of address data and numeric data.
When a command key that causes command key input
variable #8501 to be set to a non-zero value is input, the data
input line returns to its initial state. The input numeric
data and address data can be read from 32 variables starting
with the one having the variable number set in variable
#8552, as ASCII code data.
If nothing has been input, 32 <null> codes are read.

- 106 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

EXAMPLE
Assume that the variables are set as follows:
#8502=3;
#8552=500;
and that the following is input:
0123456ABCD
When the <INPUT> key is pressed,
the following data is read from the variables:
#500=48
#501=49
#502=50
#503=51
#504=52
#505=53
#506=54
#507=65
#508=66
#509=67
#510=68
#511=<Null>
•
•
•
#531=<Null>
#8501=8

NOTES
1 The macro variables starting with the one having
the number set in variable #8552 retain their
previous values until the <INPUT> key is pressed.
It is after the <INPUT> key is pressed that the new
values are set in these variables.
2 The values of variables #8503 and #8504 are not
guaranteed.
3 If a non-zero macro variable number is set in
variable #8552, this function is executed
unconditionally when the <INPUT> key is pressed.
In this case, the input data cannot be read from
character string variable #8550.

- 107 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

6.2.4 Consecutive input of cursor and page keys

Command key input variable #8501 allows consecutive input

of cursor and page keys.
When a cursor or page key is pressed and held down, the
data for the cursor or page key is set in variable #8501 with
the following timing, and can be read consecutively. Note
that the cursor or page key is not buffered in variable 8501
but that the data is read with the following timing.

It is assumed below that data is read from variable #8501 as soon as it is

set.

Page key ON

OFF
#8501 = Data

#8501 = 0

256 32 32 (MSEC)

6.2.5 MDI key image reading function (variables #8540 to #8549)

From control variables #8540 to #8549, the MDI key images

showing the current MDI key pressing states can be read.
Using these variables, the states of the MDI keys currently
pressed can be monitored.
The pressing of the SHIFT
key + a key can be distinguished
from the pressing of the key once. See the key code list for
details.
Each of the variables showing the MDI key images can be
read in 8-bit binary format.

EXAMPLE
When the SHIFT
and keys are pressed at the
same time on the standard MDI keyboard ("&" is
5
input), 32 (= 2 ) is set in variable #8542 and 64 (=
6
2 ) is set in variable #8544.

- 108 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

EXAMPLE OF USE
To cause "PUSH" to blink while the PAGE
key is
pressed and held down on the standard MDI
keyboard, enter the following:
:
#100=#8501 ;
IF [#100 NE 2] GOTO 20 ;
N10 G243 X0 Y0 A1 B1 (PUSH);
#101 = #8544 AND 2 ;
IF [#101 EQ 0] GOTO 20 ;
M99 P10 ;
N20 G243 X0 Y0 A1 K4 ;
:

MDI keyboard type reading variable

Depending on the MDI keyboard type, the key image of each

variable and bit differs. (See the key code list.)
By reading variable #8533, the type of the MDI keyboard can
be determined.
#8533 = 0: Standard keyboard
= 1: Full keyboard

Cautions
CAUTIONS
1 This function is effective for the standard and full
keyboards for the 15i-MA.
2 The key image of each variable and bit differs from
that of the FS15-B.

Key code list

SKL, SKR, and SK1 to SK10 in the key code list are key
codes of soft keys. The correspondence between the key
codes and the MDI keys is as follows.

• For 74-character display

- 109 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

• For 80-character display

15i-MA Standard Keyboard

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#8540 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

#8541 CAN EOB / • - 9 8

#8542 ← → SHIFT HELP INPUT DELETE INSERT ALTER

CALC
#8543 Not used CUSTOM GRAPH MESSAGE SYSTEM OFFSET PROG POS
SETTING
#8544 B H D F PAGE↑ PAGE↓ ↑ ↓
SP & ] [
#8545 RESET SK3 SK2 SK1 SKL

#8546 SKR SK10 SK9 SK8 SK7 SK6 SK5 SK4

#8547 Q Z Y X P G N O
? W V U C E ) (
#8548 L T S M R K J I
+ * = # _ @ A ,
#8549

NOTE
The key code shown by hatching is the one
assumed when the key is pressed in combination
with the SHIFT
key.

- 110 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

15i-MA Full Keyboard

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8540 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
=
8541 CAN EOB • - 9 8
, +
8542 ← → SHIFT HELP INPUT DELETE INSERT ALTER
CALC
8543 Not used CUSTOM GRAPH MESSAGE SYSTEM OFFSET PROG POS
SETTING
8544 B H D F PAGE↑ PAGE↓ ↑ ↓
" & # %
8545 RESET SK3 SK2 SK1 SKL

8546 SKR SK10 SK9 SK8 SK7 SK6 SK5 SK4

8547 Q Z Y X P G N O
> @ ) ( < * ?
8548 L T S M R K J I
; ¥ SP : '
8549 W V U E C A
] [ _ $ / !

NOTE
The key code shown by hatching is the one
assumed when the key is pressed in combination
with the SHIFT
key.

- 111 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

6.3 Address Functions

An address function returns the contents of a PMC address

or the contents of a CNC parameter as a function value.
An address function cannot be used on the left side of an
expression because the contents cannot be written.

6.3.1 PMC address reference

Format
<address><address-number>

or
<address><address-number>.<bit-position>

The valid range of each PMC address is as shown in the table

below.

Address For NB6

G 0 to 511 (0.0 to 511.7)
1000 to 1511 (1000.0 to 1511.7)
F 0 to 511 (0.0 to 511.7)
1000 to 1511 (1000.0 to 1511.7)
X 0 to 127 (0.0 to 127.7)
Y 0 to 127 (0.0 to 127.7)
R 0 to 2999 (0.0 to 2999.7)
9000 to 9199 (9000.0 to 9199.7)
D 0 to 7999 (0.0 to 7999.7)
T 0 to 299 (0.0 to 299.7)
K 0 to 39 (0.0 to 39.7)
900 to 909 (900.0 to 909.7)
C 0 to 199 (0.0 to 199.7)

NOTE
If a value exceeding the applicable valid range is
specified, the correct value cannot be read.

- 112 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

EXAMPLES
1 #100=G100.1
The value of bit 1 of PMC address G100 is set in
variable #100.
2 #100=T10
The contents of PMC address T10 is set in variable
#100.
3 #101=C22.2
The value of bit 2 of PMC address C22 is set in
variable #101. The PMC address that can be
used are G, F, X, Y, D, R, T, C, and K. The
notation must conform to the description in PMC
Ladder. Refer to the "FANUC PMC-MODEL
PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB
5/SB6/SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2 Programming Manual
(Ladder Language)" (B-61863E) Version 12 or later
for details.

6.3.2 CNC parameter reference

Format
P<parameter-number>

or
P<parameter-number>.<servo-axis-number/spindle-
number>

Refer to "FANUC Series 15i/150i-MA Parameter Manual"

(B-63330EN) for details of parameters.

EXAMPLES
1 #100=P1000
The value of CNC parameter No. 1000 is set in
macro variable #100.
2 #100=P1020.2
The value of the second axis of CNC parameter
No. 1020 is set in macro variable #100.

When this function is executed, either Series 15B-compatible

specifications or Series 15i specifications can be selected by
the API bit (bit 0 of parameter No. 8559).

- 113 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

NOTE
When the Series 15B-compatible specifications are
selected, a parameter value of the Series 15B can
be reference by entering the parameter number.
Note that only parameters of which input
specifications are completely compatible with those
of the Series 15i can be referenced. If an attempt
is made to reference another type of parameter,
empty(#0) is read as the value. If an execution
macro references that type of parameter, alarm
PS302 is issued.

When the Series 15i specifications are selected, all

parameters can be referenced. The parameters
can be referenced in the same units as the values
displayed on the parameter screen. However, if
parameters No. 2210 and No. 2211, which are
used for Program Encryption, are referenced, zero
is read.

- 114 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

6.4 PMC Address Reading/Writing (G310)

PMC address writing

Format
G310 Dd Qq Ll ;
G310 Rr Qq Ll ;
G310 Cc Qq Ll ;
G310 Kk Qq Ll ;
G310 Tt Qq Ll ;
D: PMC address D
R: PMC address R
C: PMC address C
K: PMC address K
T: PMC address T
Q: Data to be written
L: Data size

The data specified for address Q is written to PMC addresses

D, R, C, K, and T, with the size specified for address L. The
data specified for address Q is rounded off to the nearest
integer value, as required, and converted into binary format
before being written.
If the data is a negative numeric value, it is converted to a
two's complement.
If the data to be written is more than a word, the lowest byte
is written to the lowest address, the second lowest byte to the
second lowest address, and so on.

EXAMPLE
#100 = -500.0 ;
G310 D300 Q#100 L4 ;
When the above program is executed, the following
data is written to the PMC data area (D300 to
D303).

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D300 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
D301 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
D302 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
D303 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
The two's complement of the decimal number -500.0 is
FFFFFE0Ch.

- 115 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

NOTES
1 Data cannot be specified in bit units.
2 If the specified data exceeds the byte length
specified for address L, only the specified byte
length of data is written and no error handling is
performed.
In the example shown on the previous page, if "L1"
is specified, the lowest byte (0CH) of -500.0 is
written in D300 only.

PMC address reading

• Format
G310 Dd Pp Ll ;
G310 Rr Pp Ll ;
G310 Cc Pp Ll ;
G310 Kk Pp Ll ;
G310 Tt Pp Ll ;
D: PMC address D
R: PMC address R
C: PMC address C
K: PMC address K
T: PMC address T
P: Number of the variable in which data is to be set
L: Data size

By specifying a variable number for address P with the

control code (G310) command, data can be read from PMC
addresses D, R, C, K, and T. By using address L, 2/4-byte
data can be read as a batch.
The data that has been read is regarded to be binary format
data with the specified byte length, converted, and stored in
the variable specified for address P. If the data to be read is
more than a word, the data from the lowest address is
written to the lowest byte, the data from the second lowest
address to the second lowest byte, and so on.

EXAMPLE
Assume that the PMC data area (D400 and D401)
contains the following data:
D400 = 0Ch
D401 = Feh
and that the following is issued:
G310 D400 P101 L2;
then, "-500.0" is input to variable #101.

- 116 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

NOTES
1 If the byte length of the data to be read is 1 byte,
the data can also be read with the PMC address
function. The function, however, converts the
data into signed data (two's complement
representation), so that different data may be
stored.
2 Whether writing or reading control is to be
performed is determined by which of addresses Q
and P is specified. If both addresses Q and P are
specified, writing control is executed.
3 The addresses other than D, R, C, K, and T (such
as X, Y, G, and F) cannot be used for specification.
4 Only one of 1, 2, and 4 bytes can be specified for
address L.
When a value other than 2 and 4 is specified or
when address L is omitted, reading/writing of 1-
byte data is performed.
5 The valid range of each PMC address is as shown
in the table below.
If a command exceeding any of the ranges is
executed, writing may not be performed correctly.

Address Valid PMC address range

R 0 to 2999, 9000 to 9199
D 0 to 7999
K 0 to 39, 900 to 909
C 0 to 199
T 0 to 299

Differences from the FS15-B

Function FS15-B FS15i

Writing and • There are PMC-NA and • For data of two or more
reading data to PMC-NB, and for data of bytes, the order is always
and from the two or more bytes, the from the lowest to the
PMC order of the highest to highest byte.
the lowest byte may be
changed to the order of
the lowest to the highest
byte.

- 117 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

6.5 Reader/Puncher Interface

6.5.1 General

Using conversational macro (talk macro) functions/auxiliary

macro functions, communication lines can be controlled.
Line control is performed using the following seven control
codes.
Line control functions are effective when PCR (bit 7 of
parameter No. 8508) is 1.

G330: Line open

G331: Line close
G335: 1-byte reception
G336: Data transmission
G337: Macro variable input
G338: Macro variable output
G339: File information reading/file deletion

One of the following four line control methods can be selected

when a line is opened.

(1) Hard flow control

The line is opened in bidirectional mode and the macro
executor does not perform output control with control
codes DC1 to DC4. Use this method when creating a
user-unique protocol. When an overflow is detected in
the receive buffer, the remote device is requested to
stop/resume transmission by turning the control signal
RS on/off.

(2) Reception control (automatic control with DC1/DC3)

When the line is opened, the DC1 code is automatically
sent to request the remote device to send data. When
the line is closed, the DC3 code is sent. When an
overflow is detected in the receive buffer, control is
automatically performed with DC1 and DC3. When the
line is opened in reception control mode, G336 for data
transmission and G338 for macro variable output cannot
be executed.

(3) Transmission control (automatic control with DC2/DC4)

When the line is opened, the DC2 code is automatically
sent to request the remote device to receive data. When
the line is closed, the DC4 code is sent. The
interruption and resumption of transmission due to DC3
and DC1 from the remote device are automatically
performed.
When the line is opened in transmission control mode,
- 118 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

G335 for 1-byte reception and G337 for macro variable

input cannot be executed.

(4) File control

When the FANUC Handy File, FANUC Floppy Cassette,
FANUC FA Card, or FANUC Program File Mate is used,
and the line is opened in file control mode, it is possible
to acquire file names and sizes, delete files, and change
file names.

Completion codes are available for checking whether

input/output processing has been executed correctly. Check
the completion code after executing a control code.
All completion codes are for read only.

#8537: Completion code for the result of executing an

auxiliary macro
#8538: Completion code for the result of executing a
conversational macro (talk macro)
#8539: Completion code common to auxiliary macros
and conversational macros (talk macros)

See Section 6.5.6, "Completion codes" for details of

completion codes.

6.5.2 Functions

Line open G330

• Format
G330 Pp Bb Ss Cc ;

P: Interface number and control method of the input/output

device for the foreground

P = 1: Hard flow control with RS-232-C1

2: Hard flow control with RS-232-C2
3: Hard flow control with RS-232-C3

101: Reception control with RS-232-C1

102: Reception control with RS-232-C2
103: Reception control with RS-232-C3
110: Reception control with remote buffer
113: Reception control with RS422

- 119 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

201: Transmission control with RS-232-C1

202: Transmission control with RS-232-C2
203: Transmission control with RS-232-C3
210: Transmission control with remote buffer
213: Transmission control with RS422

301: File control with RS-232-C1

302: File control with RS-232-C2
303: File control with RS-232-C3
310: File control with remote buffer
313: File control with RS422

B: Baud rate of the input/output device

b = 1: 50b/s 2: 100b/s 3: 110b/s

4: 150b/s 5: 200b/s 6: 300b/s
7: 600b/s 8: 1200b/s 9: 2400b/s
10: 4800b/s 11: 9600b/s 12: 19200b/s

S: Number of stop bits

s = 1: 1 stop bit, data parity not used

2: 2 stop bits, data parity not used
11: 1 stop bit, data parity used
12: 2 stop bits, data parity used

NOTE
When the FANUC Handy File, FANUC Floppy
Cassette, FANUC FA Card, or FANUC Program File
Mate is used, specify S11/S12.

C: Output code specification

c = 0: ISO code
1: EIA code

• Explanation
This code opens a specified line according to the control
conditions to make it usable.

Line close G331

• Format
G331 ;

• Explanation
This code closes an open line.
When a line is closed, the completion code is always 0
(normal termination).

- 120 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

1-byte reception G335

• Format
G335 Pp ;

P: Number of the macro variable in which the received data

is to be stored

• Explanation
This code reads one byte of received data and stores it in a
specified macro variable.

When a line is opened in transmission control mode, 1-byte

reception cannot be executed. If an attempt is made to
execute it, a completion code of 20 is set.

Data transmission G336

• Format
G336 Cc (c ) (*H ) Kk Ff.e Dd Pp Zz ;

• Explanation
This code sends data in a specified format.
The addresses to be specified are the same as those of screen
display control G243. See Section 6.1.2.4, "Character
display" for details.
When a line is opened in reception control mode, data
transmission cannot be executed. If an attempt is made to
execute it, a completion code of 20 is set.

6.5.3 Macro variable input/output functions

Macro variable data input G337

• Format
G337 Pp Qq R99 ;

P: Read variable number (effective when variable number

"N" is not specified)
Q: Number of read variables (optional)
R: Continuous reading specification (optional)

• Explanation
This code sets the macro variable data received from a line
opened in reception control mode into the macro variable
having a specified number.

- 121 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

The tape format of macro variable data is as follows:

% LF N  P  LF P  LF %

Leading portion Variable Variable data Variable data Tape end

Start of input number

Any information that may precede the first appearance of

"LF" on the tape is ignored. The information ranging from
the first "LF" to the tape end ("%") is regarded to be
significant.
In significant information, the section delimited by two "LFs"
is called a block. A single block contains the data for a
single macro variable. In a block, address "N" indicates the
variable number, and address "P" indicates variable data.
Address "N" is optional. When it is omitted, the variable
number is assumed to be the variable number in the
immediately preceding block plus 1.
When "N" is omitted in the first block, the variable number
specified for address "P" with G337 is assumed. This makes
it possible to prepare a tape without address "N" and store
the data in any desired macro variable using "G337 Pp."

Address "P" on the tape indicates the value of the variable,

and cannot be omitted. If the value is null (#0), "P" must be
followed by "LF" without specifying the numeric value, as
shown below.

LF N  P LF

NOTES
1 G337 is a one-shot code.
2 In a significant information section, any codes other
than "LF," tape end "%," addresses "N" and "P," and
subsequent numeric data are ignored.

By using address Q, the number of variables to be read can

be specified. When the specified number of variables have
been read, a completion code of 99 is set, notifying that
continuous reading is possible. If the tape end "%" is read
before the specified number of variables are read, a
completion code of 0 is set. When address Q is omitted, an
infinite number of variables is assumed.

- 122 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

When the number of variables to be read is specified and a

completion code of 99 is set, the subsequent macro variable
data can be read by specifying R99.
When continuous reading R99 is not specified, the data for
the next variable will be lost because of the significant
information check (discarding of the data up to the first
":(LF).")

EXAMPLE
Input of macro variable data
To read the following data in which macro variable
number address "N" is omitted, enter the following:

% LF P____ LF .... P____ LF P____ LF .... P____ LF P____ LF .... P____ LF %

Data for 10 Data for 20 Data for the
variables variables remaining variables

G330 Pp Bp ..... ;

G337 P100 Q10 ; The data for the first 10 variables is

IF [#8539 NE 99] GOTO 888 ; stored in variables #100 to #109.

G337 P15000 Q20 R99 ; The data for the next 20 variables is
IF [#8539 NE 0] GOTO 888 ; stored in variables #15000 to #15019.

G337 P16000 R99 ; The data for the remaining variables

IF [#8539 NE 0] GOTO 888 ; is stored in variable #16000 and
above.
G331 ;

Macro variable data output G338

• Format
G338 Pp Qq Ff.e Zz Rr;

P: Specification of the number of the first output macro

variable
Q: Specification of the number of output macro variable
data items
F: Specification of the output format of macro variable data
f: Specifies the total number of digits.
e: Specifies the number of decimal places.
Z: Specification of the zero suppression of macro variable
data
z = 0: Does not perform zero suppression.
1: Performs zero suppression.
R: Tape format of output data
r = 0: Standard format. (The standard format is also
assumed when R is omitted.)
1: Does not output macro variable numbers.

- 123 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

NOTES
1 The value specified for address F is interpreted in
the same way as that specified with screen display
control G243, except F-9.8 and F-9.9. See Section
6.1.2.4, "Character display" for details.
F-9.8 and F-9.9 will be described in detail later.
2 The value specified for address Z is interpreted in
the same way as that specified with screen display
control G243. See Section 6.1.2.4, "Character
display" for details.

• Explanation
This code converts specified macro variable data to a
predetermined tape format and sends it from a line opened in
transmission control mode The output code depends on the
C specification when the line is opened.
The output data tape format is the same as the input format:
Address "N" for the first variable number and address "P" for
variable data are output to the first block, the specified
number of variable data items are output consecutively to the
subsequent blocks, with address "P," and finally, the tape
end ("%") code is output.

Using PTC (bit 3 of parameter No. 8509), it is possible to

output a "CR" code to each block. It can be used to start a
new line on a printing device.

PTC = 0: "CR" is not output after "LF."

% LF N3000P1234 LF P5678 LF %

PTC = 1: "CR" is output twice after "LF."

% LF CR CR N3000P1234 LF CR CR P5678 LF CR CR %

For address F, the following specifications are possible:

When -9.9 is specified for f, the significant digits of macro

variable data is automatically identified and output. The
maximum number of digits that can be output is 12. The
output tape format is the same as that described above.
If, however, the variable data is outside the following range:
- 999999999999. to - 0.00000000001
999999999999. to 0.00000000001

"LF" is output following "P" in the same way as when the

data is null.

- 124 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

When -9.8 is specified for f, data is output in floating-point

format. The output tape format is the same as that
described above, except that address "Q" is output instead of
address "P" and the variable data is fixed to 10 characters.
The macro variable data that has been output in this tape
format can be read by using G337; the data is stored in the
appropriate variables in floating-point format.
During output, the feed portion is not controlled. To
perform feed using a paper tape punch, etc., use data
transmission G336.

NOTES
1 f is set to 9.3 when the power is turned on. When a
value is specified for address f, that value is stored.
When F is omitted, the previously specified value
takes effect.
2 z is set to 0 when the power is turned on. When a
value is specified for address Z, that value is stored.
When Z is omitted, the previously specified value
takes effect.

Using address R, it is possible to suppress the output of

macro variable numbers.
When variable numbers are not output, the output variable
data can be stored in any desired variables using address P
with macro variable input function G337.
Because "%" is output by line open G330 and line close G331,
multiple variable groups can be output in a single tape
format.

- 125 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

EXAMPLE
Macro variable output

G330 Pp Bp ..... ; Open the line and outputs "%."

G338 P10000 Q10 F8.3 Z1 R1 ; Output data from variables #10000

IF [#8539 NE 0] GOTO 999 ; to #10009 without variable
numbers.

G338 P11000 Q20 F8.3 Z1 R1 ; Output data from variables #11000

IF [#8539 NE 0] GOTO 999 ; to #11019 without variable
numbers.

G338 P12000 Q20 F8.3 Z1 R1 ; Output data from variables #11000

IF [#8539 NE 0] GOTO 999 ; to #11019 without variable
numbers.

G331 ; Output "%" and close the line.

% LF P____ LF .... P____ LF P____ LF .... P____ LF P____ LF .... P____ LF %

#10000 to #10009 #11000 to #11019 #12000 to #12019

NOTES
1 G338 is a one-shot G code.
2 If improper data is specified for the variable number,
output processing is interrupted and a completion
code of 115 is set.

6.5.4 Data transmission/reception waiting cancellation

If the system is placed in the data transmission/reception

waiting state for a specified time, that block can be forcibly
terminated. This is possible with the following control code:

G335: 1-byte reception

G336: Data transmission
G337: Macro variable data input
G338: Macro variable data output

Set the waiting time for parameter No. 8540.

By setting CAN (bit 1 of parameter No. 8507) to 1, it is
possible to terminate that block by pressing the cancel key on
the MDI/LCD panel even within the waiting time. A
completion code of 200 is set.

- 126 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

EXAMPLE
Program in which cancellation is taken into
consideration

09000;
N1 G330 P101 B10 S12 C0; Line open
N2 IF [#8539 NE 0] GOTO 10;
N3 G335 P500; 1-byte reception
N4 IF [#8539 NE 0] GOTO 11;
N5 G331; Line close

N11 G331;
N12 G243 X0 Y1 (DATA INPUT ERROR);

If, in block N3, the reception waiting state continues even

after the time set for parameter No. 8540, block N3 is
terminated and control jumps from block N4 to the error
handling block N11. At this time, completion code variable
#8539 is set to 200.
By using the appropriate parameter, block N3 can be
terminated by pressing the cancel key on the MDI/LCD panel
even when the reception waiting state continues in block N3.

NOTE
Cancellation by using parameters No. 8540 and
setting CAN (bit 1 of parameter No. 8507) to 1 is
also effective to the transmission/reception
commands executed by auxiliary macros. If
transmission/reception is to be performed by an
auxiliary macro, therefore, the possibility that the
cancel key may be pressed regardless of the state
of the auxiliary macro must be taken into
consideration during programming.

6.5.5 FANUC cassette control

Using line open G330 and file information control G339, it is

possible to read file data from FANUC Handy File, FANUC
Floppy Cassette, FANUC FA Card, and FANUC PROGRAM
File Mate, create and delete files, and perform other
operations.

Searching for the beginning of a file G330

File creation G330
File information reading G330/G339 P1
File deletion G330/G339 P2
File renaming G330/G339 P3
- 127 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Searching for the beginning of a file G330

• Format
G330 Pp Bb Ss Cc (Ll/Ff/Aa) ;

• Explanation
When a line is opened in reception control mode, with one of
address L, F, and A specified, it is possible to search for the
beginning of a specified file on the FANUC cassette tape.

For an explanation of specifying addresses P, B, S, and C, see

the explanation of line open G330. Address P must be
reading control (p = 101/102 ....).

Select one of addresses L, F, and A, referring to the following

explanation.

(1) Searching for the beginning of a file using its file name

By specifying address L, it is possible to search for the

beginning of a file using its file name.
Set the ASCII codes (decimal) of the file name in macro
variables having consecutive 17 numbers and specify the
number of the first macro variable for address L.

EXAMPLE
To search for the beginning of the file "ABCD," set
65 (A), 66 (B), 67 (C), 68 (D), 32, 32, ..., and 32
(space) in 17 macro variables #100 to #116.

G330 P101 B10 S12 C0 L100 ;

The above command searches for the beginning of

the file "ABCD."

NOTES
1 The file name must consist of 17 characters. If the
file name consists of less than 17 characters, fill the
remaining variables with a value of 32 (space) to
make the name consist of 17 characters.
2 The file name can use alphanumeric characters and
spaces. The file name cannot, however, start with
a space. If this occurs, a completion code of 20 is
set.

- 128 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

(2) Searching for the beginning of a file using its file number

By specifying address F, it is possible to search for the

beginning of a file using its file number.
Specify the number of the file to search for (1 to 9999).

EXAMPLE
To search for the beginning of a file with file number
3, enter the following:

G330 P101 P10 S12 C0 F3 ;

(3) Searching for the beginning of the next file

By specifying address A, it is possible to search for the

beginning of the file following the one the beginning of which
has been searched for. Use this address to read files in
succession. For address A, always specify 1 (a = 1).
Otherwise, a completion code of 20 is set.

EXAMPLE
To search for the beginning of the file following the
one the beginning of which has been searched for,
enter the following:

G330 P101 B10 S12 C0 A1 ;

File creation G330

• Format
G330 Pp Bb Ss Cc (Ll/Ff) ;

• Explanation
When a line is opened in transmission control mode, with
either address L and F specified, it is possible to create a new
file on the FANUC cassette tape.

For an explanation of specifying addresses P, B, S, and C, see

the explanation of line open G330. Address P must be
writing control (p = 201/202 ....).

Select either address L or F, referring to the following

explanation.

- 129 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

(1) Creating a file with a file name

By specifying address L, it is possible to create a file with a

file name. Set the ASCII codes (decimal) of the file name in
macro variables having consecutive 17 numbers and specify
the number of the first macro variable for address L.

EXAMPLE
To create a file "ABCD," set 65 (A), 66 (B), 67 (C),
68 (D), 32, 32, ..., and 32 (space) in 17 macro
variables #100 to #116.

G330 P201 B10 S12 C0 L100 ;

The above command crates a file with the file name

"ABCD."

NOTES
1 The file name must consist of 17 characters. If the
file name consists of less than 17 characters, fill the
remaining variables with a value of 32 (space) to
make the name consist of 17 characters.
2 The file name can use alphanumeric characters and
spaces. The file name cannot, however, start with
a space. If this occurs, a completion code of 20 is
set.
3 The created file is added at the end of the already
registered ones.

(2) Creating a file with a file number

By specifying address F, it is possible to create a new file

with a specified file number. Specify the number of the file
to be created (1 to 9999).

EXAMPLE
To create a file with file number 3, enter the
following:

G330 P201 P10 S12 C0 F3 ;

- 130 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

NOTES
1 When a file is created with a file number, the existing
file with that file number is deleted, as well as any
files with the subsequent file numbers.
For the FANUC Handy File in DOS format, however,
the files with the file numbers subsequent to the
specified number are not deleted.
2 This method of creating a file with a file number
allows only an existing file number to be specified.
To add a new file, create it with a file name.

File information control G330/G339

• Format
G330 Pp Bb Ss ;
p = 301: File control with RS-232-C1
302: File control with RS-232-C2
303: File control with RS-232-C3
310: File control with remote buffer
313: File control with RS422

For an explanation of addresses B and S, see the explanation

of line open G330. When a line is opened in file information
control mode, file information reading and file deletion
cannot be executed more than once while the line is open.
For example, after file information is read and checked, the
line must be closed before that file can be deleted.

G339 Pp (Ll Ss Ff) ;

p = 1: Reads file information
2: Deletes a file
3: Rename a file

Specify addresses L, S, and F as required.

• Explanation
G339 can be used to read file information, delete a file, and
rename a file.

File information reading G339 P1

File deletion G339 P2
File renaming G339 P3

To enable of the use of this function, the control mode must

be file information control mode when the line is opened
(G330). To specify file information control mode, specify
301/302 ... for address P when opening the line.

- 131 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

EXAMPLE
Order in which commands are issued
1) Open the line in file information control mode.
2) File information reading
3) Line close
4) Open the line in file information control mode.
5) File deletion
6) Line close

(1) File information reading G339 P1

G339 P1 stores file information (file name and size) in

specified macro variables.

G339 P1 Ff Ll Ss ;

F: File number specification (1 to 9999)

L: Number of the first one of the consecutive 17 macro
variables used to store the 17-character file name to be
read. The file name is stored as ASCII codes (decimal).
S: Number of the macro variable used to store the file size
to be read

By reading file information by specifying a file number for

address F and then issuing G339 P1 with a file number
omitted, the file information for the next file number can be
read. If a file with the specified file number does not exist, a
completion code of 23 is set.

(2) File deletion G339 P2

G339 P2 deletes a specified file.

G339 P2 (Ll/Ff) ;

Specify the file with its file name or file number.

L: Number of the first one of the consecutive 17 macro

variables used to store the 17-character file name of the
file to be deleted. The file name must be set with ASCII
codes (decimal).
F: File number specification (1 to 9999)

NOTE
When a file is deleted, any subsequent files are
moved backward, with their file numbers changed.
Bear this in mind when issuing a command with a
file number after deleting a file.

- 132 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

(3) File renaming

G339 P3 renames a specified file.

G339 P3 Ll Ff ;

Specify the file number of the file to be renamed and the new
file name.

F: File number specification (1 to 9999)

L: Number of the first one of the consecutive 17 macro
variables containing the ASCII codes of the new 17-
character file name

6.5.6 Completion codes

Completion codes are returned for G330 to G339 commands.

If an error occurs, its description is set in a completion code.
Check the completion code after issuing a command.
There are three types of completion codes:

#8537: Completion code for the result of executing an

auxiliary macro
#8538: Completion code for the result of executing a
conversational macro (talk macro)
#8539: Completion code common to auxiliary commands and
conversational macros (talk macros)

When the command specified in an auxiliary macro program

is completed, a completion code is set in both variables #8537
and #8539. If the command specified in a conversational
macro (talk macro) program is completed, a completion code
is set in both variables #8438 and #8539.

Value Description
0 Normal termination
1 An illegal command was issued.
3 No line function option.
10 Line error (DR signal off)
11 Line error (CD signal off)
12 Line error (overrun error)
13 Line error (framing error)
14 Line error (buffer over error)
15 The line is not open.
20 Invalid parameter
G336 or G338 was issued in reception control mode.
G335 or G337 was issued in transmission control mode.
G339 was specified in a mode other than file control mode.

- 133 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Value Description
21 Invalid data format
22 Invalid file number
23 A file with the number specified with the file information reading code
does not exist.
30 The line is busy.
99 With macro variable input function G337, the continuous reading of
macro variables is possible.
115 An undefined variable number is specified.
200 The specified time has elapsed since the system entered the data
transmission/reception waiting state.
The cancel key was pressed in the data transmission/reception
waiting state.
255 There is no receive data.

- 134 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

6.6 Referencing and Writing CNC Programs

6.6.1 General

Using the conversational macro (talk macro) function and

auxiliary macro function enables CNC part programs to be
registered, deleted, and modified.
Program and block numbers are used to manage CNC
programs. Block No. 1 in a program is assigned to the block
having address O in the program, and subsequent block
numbers are sequentially assigned to individual blocks
identified by an EOB.
A macro-based CNC program is comprised of blocks that are
a repetition of two variables (address code and value)
representing data at one address.
Using this function requires that parameter PCR (bit 7 of
parameter No. 8508) to be set 1.

EXAMPLE
O0001; Block No. 1
G00 X10; Block No. 2
M03 S1000; Block No. 3
:

Program No. 0001, block No. 3, storage variable No.

100

#100= 13 Address M
#101= 3 Value
#102= 19 Address S
#103= 1000 Value
#104= 27 Address EOB

Control commands are issued by specifying G codes (G328,

G329, G370 to G377) with macros. Completion codes are
available which can be used to check whether specified
functions have been executed normally. Completion codes
should be checked after G328, G329, and G370 to G377 are
executed.

- 135 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Control variables
#8520: Program number specification
#8521: Block number specification
#8522: Storage variable number specification
#8523: Variable number for specifying the number of
decimal places
#8526: Background editing status (read-only)
#8527: Number of registered programs (read-only)
#8528: Free-space capacity of CNC program memory (read-
only)
#8529: Completion code (read-only)

Control codes
G370: Newly registers a program.
G371: Deletes a program.
G375: Reads a specified block.
G376: Writes a block.
G377: Deletes a block.
G322: Condenses a program.
G328: Reads a specified character-type block.
G329: Writes a specified character-type block.

NOTE
When the power is switched on, #8520 to #8523 are
reset to 0.

6.6.2 Details of control codes and control variables

Newly registering a program (G370)

• Format
G370;

• Explanation
To newly register a program, issue G370 by specifying a
program number for the program.

- 136 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

EXAMPLE
To register O0002:

#8520=2;
G370;
IF [#8529 NE 0] GOTO 900;
Registration completed

N900;
Error

Newly registering a program involves the same processing as

for "Oxxxx"+"INSERT" (editing); no EOB is inserted.

EXAMPLE
O0002 %

Deleting a program (G371)

• Format
G371;

• Explanation
To delete a program, issue G371 by specifying the program
number of the program.

EXAMPLE
To delete O0003:

#8520=3;
G371;
IF [#8529 NE 0] GOTO 900;
Deletion completed

N900;
Error

- 137 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Reading a specified block (G375)

• Format
G375;

• Explanation
A block can be read into a specified variable area by
specifying its program number and block number. The
block number used here is relative to the O-number block,
which is counted as block No. 1. Therefore, it is different
from a sequence number (Nxxxx). A block number is used
also in G376, G377, G328, and G329.

EXAMPLE 1
O0004;
G92 X0. M08;
G90 G00 X10.5 M05;
Assuming the above steps, the variable area will be:

#8520=4;
#8521=3;
#8522=100;
G375;
IF [#8529 NE 0] GOTO 900;
Read completed

N900;
Error

Executing the above commands causes program data to be

stored in an area starting at #100 specified using storage
variable number #8522, as follows:

#100= 7 Address G
#101= 90 Value
#102= 7 Address G
#103= 0 Value
#104= 24 Address X
#105=10.5 Value
#106= 13 Address M
#107= 5 Value
#108= 27 Address EOB

- 138 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

If a program does not end with an EOB, or the location of an

EOR is specified with a block number, the EOR (28) is stored
as an address. If a block number greater than that of the
block containing the EOR is specified, a completion code of
255 occurs, resulting in no read processing being performed.

EXAMPLE 2
O0004;
G92 X0. M08;
M02
%
Assuming the above steps, the variable area will be:

#100= 13 Address M
#101= 2 Value
#102=28 Address EOR

EXAMPLE 3
O0004;
G92 X0. M08;
%
Assuming the above steps, the variable area will be:

#100=28 Address EOR

Writing a block (G376)

• Format
G376 Pp;
p: Maximum allowable number of variable data items

• Explanation
Program data created in a variable area can be written at the
end of a block specified using a program number and block
number. The maximum allowable number of variable data
items is specified using address P. If there is address EOB
within the specified variable data, the data up to the EOB is
written. If there is address EOR, the data that precedes the
EOR is written. If there is neither EOB nor EOR, a number
of data items specified using address P are written.

- 139 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

EXAMPLE
O0004;
G92 X0. M08;
G90 G00 X10.5 M05;
Assuming the above steps, the variable area will be:

#8520=4;
#8521=2;
#8522=100;
#100=7;
#101=1;
#102=24;
#103=20.5;
#104=6;
#105=1000;
#106=27;
G376 P7;
IF [#8529 NE 0] GOTO 900;
Write completed

N900;
Error

Executing the program data shown above causes the

following blocks to be inserted in the program.

O0004;
G92 X0. M08;
G1 X20.5 F1000.;
G90 G0 X10.5 M05;

If a specified block number corresponds to a block that

contains an EOR only or is greater than its block number, a
completion code of 255 occurs, resulting in no write
processing being performed. Specifying 0 as a block number
enables a program to be written to a program that has only a
program number, however.

Specifying the location of a decimal point for each address when writing a
block
When writing a block, the number of decimal places can be
specified at each address. The number of decimal places at
address A is specified using a value assigned to a variable
number specified in #8523. The number of decimal places
for each address can be determined as follows:

- 140 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

#8523=501;
#501 is used to represent the number of decimal places at
address A.
#502 is used to represent the number of decimal places at
address B.
•
•
#525 is used to represent the number of decimal places at
address Y.
#526 is used to represent the number of decimal places at
address Z.

Specify <null> or integer 0 to 7 as the number of decimal

places. If <null> is specified, an address with no decimal
place is assumed.

EXAMPLE
If address code = A and value = 1.2345678:

Decimal place
specification = <null> A1
=0 A1.
=1 A1.2
=2 A1.23
=3 A1.235 *
=4 A1.2346 *
=5 A1.23457 *
=6 A1.234568 *
=7 A1.2345678

* The numeral is rounded off to the specified

number of decimal places.

EXAMPLE
If #8523 is 0, the least input increment at a specified
address is used.

Special example
Usually in G375 and G376, a block consisting of a word based
on a combination of address and value, and an EOB is used
as a unit of processing as stated above. Therefore, it is
impossible to use a macro variable to represent a block skip
command that is not accompanied by a value as shown below.
In this case, a <null> variable is used to represent it.

- 141 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

EXAMPLE
Block skip specification
/M00; → #100= 29 Address /
#101= <null> Value <null>
#102= 13 Address M
#103= 0 Value 0
#104= 27 Address EOB

Deleting a block (G377)

• Format
G377;

• Explanation
G377 deletes a block specified using program and block
numbers.

EXAMPLE
#8520=4;
#8521=3;
G377;
IF [#8529 NE 0] GOTO 900;
Deletion completed

N900;
Error

Executing the above commands deletes block No. 3 from

program O0004.

Condensing a program (G322)

• Format
G322;

• Explanation
G322 condenses program memory and sorts out free areas.
Using program number specification variable (#8520)
supports two program condense types (entire program
memory and specified programs). The result of condensing
is reported using a completion code (#8529).

If #8520 = 0
The entire program memory is subjected to condense
processing. First specify #8520 = 0, then issue condense
function control code (G322).

- 142 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

EXAMPLE 1
#8520=0
G322
IF [#8529 NE 0] GOTO 900;
Entire memory condensed

N900;
Error

If a program number is specified in #8520

Only a specified program number is subjected to condense
processing. First set a desired program number in #8520,
then issue condense function control code (G322).

EXAMPLE 2
#8520=1234;
G322;
IF [#8529 NE 0] GOTO 900;
O1234 condensed

N900;
Error

Reading a specified character-type block (G328)

• Format
G328;

• Explanation
If a specified CNC program block is not represented in word-
type format (format of address + value), this command can be
used to read the block into a specified variable area using
ASCII characters (in decimal notation). Control commands
(such as WHILE and IF) and functions (such as SIN, COS,
and FUP) are represented using special codes.

EXAMPLE 1
#8520=program number;
#8521=block number;
#8522=100; (read variable number)
G328;
IF [#8529 NE 0] GOTO 900; (error check)

If a block is "#1=SIN[#2];," it is read as follows:

- 143 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

#100 : 35 ( 23H) "#"

#101 : 49 ( 31H) "1"
#102 : 61 ( 3DH) "="
#103 : 276 (114H) "SIN"
#104 : 91 ( 5BH) "["
#105 : 35 ( 23H) "#"
#106 : 50 ( 32H) "2"
#107 : 93 ( 5DH) "]"
#108 : 59 ( 3BH) ";"

If a block that was read using the word-type block read

function (G375) is a non-word type (character type), a
completion code of 253 is returned to #8529. If the
completion code is 253, try to read the block again using the
character-type block read function (G328).

EXAMPLE 2
#8520=program number;
#8521=block number;
#8522=(read variable number)
G375; (reads a specified word-type block)
IF [#8529 EQ 253] GOTO 100;
••
N100 G328; (reads a specified character-type block)

Writing a specified character-type block (G329)

• Format
G329;

• Explanation
If program data is not represented in word-type format, this
function can be used to write program data created in
character units. Program data is written to a specified
location by previously defining the program data using ASCII
code in a macro variable area and issuing this command.
The EOB and EOR are represented as ";" (59) and "%" (37),
respectively.

EXAMPLE
#8520=program number;
#8521=block number;
#8522=ASCII code string start number
G329P10;
IF [#8529 NE 0] GOTO 900; (error check)

- 144 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

The command P for the maximum allowable write data items

is the same as for writing of word-type blocks (G376).

Background editing status (#8526)

#8526: Background editing status

= 0: Background editing at a stop
= 1: Background editing in progress

This variable can be used to read the status of CNC

background editing.

Number of registered programs (#8527)

#8527: Number of registered programs

This variable can be used to read the number of programs

registered in the program memory of the CNC.

Free-space capacity of CNC program memory (#8528)

#8528: Free-space capacity of CNC program memory

(in units of characters)

This variable can be used to check the free-space capacity of

CNC program memory.

- 145 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Completion code (#8529)

Check the completion code after each type of processing is
executed.

#8529 Description
0 Normal end.
1 An attempt was made to open a program file that was already open.
2 An attempt to open a program file failed because it was being used by
another user.
3 An attempt to open a program file failed because it did not exist.
4 An attempt was made to edit a program that was running.
10 A specified program was not found (has not been registered).
11 An existing program number was specified (impossible to newly create).
12 There is no free space in part program storage.
13 There is no free space in the directory (too many programs to be registered).
15 An attempt was made to edit a word that could not be.
16 An attempt was made to edit a program that could not be.
100 A specified program is already being edited in background mode.
101 The data protection key is off.
102 An incorrect program number was specified.
103 An incorrect block number was specified.
104 An address not included in the address code table was encountered during
editing (not in "address + value" format).
105 A macro variable number for editing is incorrect.
253 A specified block is not in word-type (address + value) format.
255 Parameter PCR (bit 7 of parameter No. 8508) is 0.
A block number greater than that of a block containing an EOR was
specified.

6.6.3 Limitations

Foreground operation
This function basically runs in CNC background editing
mode. Running a created or edited program in foreground
mode requires that the program be selected. This function
does not output BGEDT<F043#3>, which is an output signal
indicating that CNC background editing is in progress.

Number of address value digits that can be written

The maximum number of address value digits that can be

written using G376 or G329 is the number of digits of the
address value that can be specified.

- 146 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

6.6.4 Appendix tables

Address code table

Address Code Address Code Address Code Address Code

A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4
E 5 F 6 G 7 H 8
I 9 J 10 K 11 L 12
M 13 N 14 O 15 P 16
Q 17 R 18 S 19 T 20
U 21 V 22 W 23 X 24
Y 25 Z 26
EOB 27 EOR 28 / 29

Special code table

Hexadecimal

Hexadecimal

Hexadecimal

Hexadecimal
Instruction

Instruction

Instruction

Instruction
Decimal

Decimal

Decimal

Decimal
IF 258 102H THEN 271 10FH BIN 283 11BH SETVN 295 127h
WHILE 259 103H XOR 272 110H FIX 284 11CH ADP 296 128H
GOTO 260 104H OR 273 111H FUP 285 11DH POW 297 129H
DO 261 105H AND 274 112H ROUND 286 11EH FGEN 298 12AH
END 262 106H ACOS 287 11FH FDEL 299 12BH
GE 264 108H SIN 276 114H ASIN 288 120H FOPEN 300 12CH
GT 265 109H COS 277 115H LN 289 121H FCLOS 301 12DH
LE 266 10AH TAN 278 116H EXP 290 122H FPSET 302 12EH
LT 267 10BH ATAN 279 117H POPEN 291 123H FREAD 303 12FH
NE 268 10CH SQRT 280 118H PCLOS 292 124H FWRIT 304 130H
EQ 269 10DH ABS 281 119H DPRNT 293 125H
MOD 270 10EH BCD 282 11AH BPRNT 294 126H

- 147 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

6.7 Cutting Time and Distance Read and Preset Functions

Control variables can be used to read and preset the cutting

time and cutting distance. This function can be used to
manage the service life of tools.

Reading and presetting the cutting time (#8553)

#8553 reads the cutting time specified in commands such as

G01 (linear interpolation), G02, and G03 (circular
interpolation). The value that is read using #8553 is the
sum of values specified in parameters (parameter Nos. 103
and 104), and they are represented in hour units in the same
way as for the corresponding macro variable (#3002). It is
also possible to preset the cutting time. When it is preset,
the related parameters (parameter Nos. 103 and 104) are
also preset.

EXAMPLE
#100=#8553 ; → The cutting time is read into #100.
#8553=0 ; → The cutting time is preset to 0; the
related parameters (parameter Nos.
103 and 104) are also preset to 0.

Reading and presetting a cutting distance (#8554)

#8554 adds up the cutting distance specified in commands

such as G01 (linear interpolation), G02, and G03 (circular
interpolation). Their measurement unit is the least input
increment for the basic axis. Writing a value to #8554
enables the cutting distance to be preset.

EXAMPLE
#100 = #8554 ; --- The cutting distance is read
into #100.
#8554 = 0 ; --- The cutting distance is preset
to 0.

- 148 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

Cautions
CAUTIONS
1 Using the functions for reading and presetting a
cutting distance requires that:
Parameter PCR (bit 7 of parameter No. 8508) = 1
Parameter CLG (bit 6 of parameter No. 8508) = 1
2 The tool travel distance is added up into #8554 at
the start of a cutting block. Even if a cutting block
is stopped prematurely, for example, due to a
reset, therefore, the travel distance specified in the
block is included in the sum.
3 Switching on the power does not reset #8553 and
#8554 to 0. The user is responsible to manage
these variables.

- 149 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

6.8 Relative Coordinate Read and Preset Functions (#8996 to

#8999)

These functions enable reading and presetting of relative

coordinates.

Reading relative coordinates

Once a target axis number is set in #8998, #8999 can be used

to read its relative coordinate.

#8997 .... Information ID. 500: Relative coordinate is

read.
#8998 .... Axis number (1 to the maximum allowable
number of controlled axes)
#8999 .... Relative coordinate
#8996 .... Completion code. 0: Normal end.
-1: Abnormal end.

EXAMPLE
If the relative coordinate of the first axis is -123.456,
executing the following steps sets #500 with -123456.
#8997 = 500;
#8998 = 1; (acquires the information about the
first axis)
#500 = #8999;

• Cautions
CAUTIONS
1 If a value that does not fall in a range between 1
and the maximum allowable number of controlled
axes is specified in #8998, #8999 is set with <null>.
2 When the power is switched on, #8999 is reset to
0.
3 The unit of a read value is the least input increment
for a specified axis.

Presetting relative coordinates

• Format
G360 Aa Qq;
A: Controlled-axis number to be subjected to presetting
(1 to the maximum allowable number of controlled
axes)
Q: Coordinate to be preset

- 150 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

Address Q specifies the coordinate to be preset.

Q = -999999999 to +999999999
Executing this control code presets the relative coordinate.

EXAMPLE
To preset the relative coordinate of the first axis to
-123.45, issue:
G360 A1 Q - 123450 ;

• Cautions
CAUTIONS
1 If address A is specified as a value that does no fall
in a range of 1 to the maximum allowable number
of controlled axes, or it is not specified, G360 is
ignored.
2 The unit of address Q is the least input increment
of the specified axis.

- 151 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

6.9 Array-Type Processing and Referencing of P-CODE Variables

Array-type processing of P-CODE variables

This function controls processing of array-type macro

variables or a sequence of macro variables.

1) Clearing array-type variables and a sequence of

variables (continuous writing of specified data)
2) Transferring from array-type variables or a sequence of
variable to a sequence of variables

Each type of processing is performed by first defining an

array, a sequence of variables, or data in each of the
following control variables, then issuing control code G315.

#8511: Source data

#8512: Source two-dimensional array number or the
start variable number of a sequence of variables
#8513: Source three-dimensional array number
#8514: Destination two-dimensional array number or
the start variable number of a sequence of
variables
#8515: Destination three-dimensional array number

• Format
G315 P (processing code) K (number of data items to
be processed);
P001 (P1) : Stores data from #8511 to K consecutive
variables starting at the one specified in
#8514.
P002 (P2) : Transfers data from K consecutive
variables starting at the one specified in
#8512 to K consecutive variables starting at
the one specified in #8514 (transfer in
ascending order).
P003 (P3) : Transfers data from K consecutive
variables starting at the one specified in
#8512 to K consecutive variables starting at
the one specified in #8514 (transfer in
descending order).
P101 : Stores data from #8511 to K consecutive
array variables starting at array variable
#1 specified in #8514 and #8515.

- 152 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

P102 : Transfers data from K consecutive array

variables starting at array variable #1
specified in #8512 and #8513 to K
consecutive array variables starting at
array variable #1 specified in #8514 and
#8515 (ascending order).
P103 : Transfers data from K consecutive array
variables starting at array variable #1
specified in #8512 and #8513 to K
consecutive array variables starting at
array variable #1 specified in #8514 and
#8515 (descending order).

Each process code consists of three digits and specifies the

type of processing to be performed. Leading zeros are
omissible.
A difference between P2 and P3 and between P102 and P103
is whether a transfer progresses from a small variable
number to a large or from a large to a small.

EXAMPLE
If #8512 = 30000 and #8514 = 30010,
G315 P2 K3; is equivalent to the following steps:
#30010 = #30000
#30011 = #30001
#30012 = #30002, and
G315 P3 K3; is equivalent to the following steps:
#30012 = #30002
#30011 = #30001
#30010 = #30000

Array-type referencing of P-CODE variables

P-CODE variables (#30000 and above) can be referenced as

two-dimensional or three-dimensional array-type variables.
Previously assigning proper values to the following array
control variables enables variable numbers #1 to #99 to be
used to reference the P-CODE variables for the
corresponding array elements.

Array control variables

#8512: Two-dimensional array number
#8513: Three-dimensional array number
#8516: Number of one-dimensional array elements
#8517: Number of two-dimensional array elements
#8518: 1
#8519: Array start variable number

- 153 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Variables #1 to #99 are used to reference the P-CODE

variables by previously specifying array types using array
control variables #8516 to #8519, then specifying the target
array numbers using #8512 and #8513.

The P-CODE variables are associated with the array

elements as shown below.

P-CODE variable number

= #8519 + ((#8516*#8517)*(#8513 - 1))
+ (#8516*(#8512 -1)) + (specified variable number - 1)

EXAMPLE
If #8516 = 10, #8517 = 5, and #8519 = 30100,
(1) #1 with #8512 = 1 and #8513 = 1 specified
corresponds to #30100.
(2) #10 with #8512 = 3 and #8513 = 2 specified
corresponds to #30179.

When the power is switched on, each array control variable is

set up as follows:
#8512 to #8517 = 1 and #8519 = 30000
So, when using P-CODE variables as two-dimensional arrays,
you need not beware of #8513 and #8517.

NOTE
1 When using variables #1 to #99 to reference P-
CODE variables as array-type, set #8518 = 1. If
#8518 = 0, an alarm is issued, because #1 to #33
are treated as local variables and #34 to #99 are
treated as unusable. When the power is switched
on, #8518 = 0.

Caution
CAUTION
1 No check is made on any variable and calculated
variable number for validity. Use a macro
program to make validity checks if necessary.

- 154 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

6.10 Torque Limit Override Control (#8990 to #8993)

Assigning appropriate values to #8990 to #8992 enables the

torque limit override to be changed to the specified value.
Assigning appropriate values to #8990 and #8991 enables a
torque limit override value to be read into #8992. Whether
setting and changing ended normally can be sensed by
accessing #8993.

Control
Set value Description
variable
8990 100 Writes a torque limit override value.
101 Reads a torque limit override value.
8991 1 to maximum allowable Control axis number
number of controlled axes
8992 0 to 255 Torque limit override value
8993 0 or -1 Completion code (0: Normal end, -1:
Abnormal end)

The following table lists the relationships between set values

and torque limit override values.

Set value Torque limit override value

0 0%
: :
255 100%

Cautions
CAUTIONS
1 When the power is switched on, the torque limit
override value for each axis is set to 100%.
2 If an attempt was made to assign a value out of a
range between 0 and 255 to #8992, the command is
ignored.

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1802 TQO

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit axis

#4 TQO Specifies whether to enable the torque limit override

function, as follows:
0: Disable (100% override)
1: Enable

- 155 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

6.11 Reading A/D Conversion Data

This function reads data from an A/D converter or a value

resulting from conversion of the load current of each
controlled axis to voltage form.
The data types that can be read are:
• General-purpose analog input
• Voltage value converted from spindle load current
• Voltage value converted from the load current of a
controlled axis (servo motor)

The present data of each channel can be input by assigning

the necessary values listed below to control variables #8997
and #8998, then by read-accessing #8999.
After this, #8996 is set with information indicating whether
the read operation ended normally (0 for normal end and -1
for abnormal end).

For controlled axes, data can be input by read-accessing the

following control variables.
#8631: Voltage value converted from the load current of
the first axis
#8632: Voltage value converted from the load current of
the second axis
:
#8645: Voltage value converted from the load current of
the fifteenth axis
#8656: Voltage value converted from the load current of
the sixteenth axis
#8657: Voltage value converted from the load current of
the seventeenth axis
:
#8664: Voltage value converted from the load current of
the twenty-fourth axis

- 156 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

List of reference systems and information ID Nos.

Connector
ID No. ID No.
Connection Information
(#8997) (#8998) 0V
line
400 1 JA6(3) (4) General-purpose analog input
2 JA6(13) (14)
1 or 3 JA6(1) (2) Analog input resulting from
conversion of the load current of
401 the first or third axis (analog
spindle) to voltage form
1 to 4 - - Value resulting from conversion of
the load current of the first to fourth
axes (serial spindle) to voltage form
402 1 to 24 - - Value resulting from conversion of
the load current of a controlled axis
(servo motor) to voltage form

NOTE
If a machine tool has both analog and serial
spindles, the first and second axes are permanently
set as serial spindle, and the third axis, as analog
spindle.

Data resulting from A/D conversion of analog inputs is

digital values 0 to +255 obtained by inputting analog voltages
of -10 V to +10 V to the A/D converter of the NC. Digital
values are proportional to the analog input voltage, with
digital values 0 and 255 corresponding to analog voltages -10
V and +10 V, respectively.

Similarly to A/D conversion data, the voltage values

converted from the load current of the spindle (serial spindle)
are proportional to the load current values, and -10 V and
+10 V correspond to 128 and 255, respectively.
Using the following expressions can obtain the peak load
current, rated load current, and percent load from the read
data.

• Peak load current [Ao-p] =

128 × ([read data] - 128) ÷ [maximum amplifier
current]
• Rated load current [Arms] =
128 × ([read data] - 128) ÷ [maximum amplifier
current] ÷√2
• Percent load [%] =
[Rated load current] ÷ [rated current] × 100

- 157 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

For the maximum amplifier current and rated current, refer

to the specification manual of your motor.

- 158 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

6.12 Reading the Distance to Go (#5181 to #5200 and #100801

to 100824)

Conversational macros (talk macros) and auxiliary macros

can be used to read the distance to go for each controlled axis
of the CNC using variables.
#5181: Distance to go for the first axis
#5182: Distance to go for the second axis
••
#5200: Distance to go for the twentieth axis

#100801: Distance to go for the first axis

#100802: Distance to go for the second axis
••
#100824: Distance to go for the twenty-fourth axis

Both #5xxx and #1xxxxx (letter x represents a digit) can be

used to read the distance to go for the first to twentieth axes.
Use #1xxxxx (letter x represents a digit) for the twenty-first
and larger-numbered axes.

NOTE
These variables cannot be write-accessed.

- 159 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

6.13 PMC Axis Control

6.13.1 General

A PMC-based axis control interface can be used to control the

PMC controlled axis. The following nine different control
codes are available. The PMC controlled axis to be
subjected to control is specified using the PMC controlled
axis selection variable (#8602).

G340 → Rapid traverse command

G341 → Cutting feed command
G344 → Dwell command
G345 → Reference position return command
G346 → Auxiliary function command
G348 → Status signal read command
G349 → Command signal write command
G350 → Machine coordinate system positioning
G351 → Override change

#8602 → PMC controlled-axis selection variable

#8602 Controlled axis

1 First axis
2 Second axis
3 Third axis
4 Fourth axis
5 Fifth axis
6 Sixth axis
7 Seventh axis
8 Eighth axis
: :
23 Twenty-third axis
24 Twenty-fourth axis

NOTES
1 If an integer out of a range between 1 and 24 is
specified in #8602, the control command is
ignored.
2 When the power is switched, #8602 = 0.

- 160 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

6.13.2 Details of control codes

Rapid traverse command (G340)

• Format
G340 Xx;
x : Travel distance

• Explanation
This command specifies rapid traverse for the PMC
controlled axis. Address X specifies a travel distance always
in incremental mode.

Cutting fed command (G341)

• Format
G341 Xx Ff;
X : Travel distance
F : Feedrate

• Explanation
This command specifies cutting feed for the PMC controlled
axis. Address X specifies a travel distance always in
incremental mode. The feedrate is specified using address
F.

Dwell command (G344)

• Format
G344 Px;
G344 Xx;
p, x: Dwell value

• Explanation
This command specifies dwell for the PMC controlled axis.
Address P or X specifies a dwell value.

Reference position return command (G345)

• Format
G345;

• Explanation
This command specifies a reference position return for the
PMC controlled axis.

- 161 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Auxiliary function command (G346)

• Format
G346 M;
M: Auxiliary function code

• Explanation
This command specifies an auxiliary function for the PMC
axis control interface. Address M specifies an auxiliary
function code.

Status signal read command (G348)

• Format
G348 Pp;
P: Variable number

• Explanation
This command reads the status signal for the PMC axis
control interface into the corresponding variable specified at
address P.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CNCAx DENx MFnX BUFx
x : PMC control axis number
n : Auxiliary function selection number ... this function
uses 1.

<1> CNCAx (axis control command read completion signal)

This signal indicates that the CNC has read PMC axis
control command data for one block and stored it in a
buffer.

<2> DENx (distribution completion signal)

When the axis is moving as specified by an axis control
command that is rapid traverse, cutting feed, reference
position return, or machine coordinate system
positioning, this signal remains to be 0. When the axis
is at a stop, the signal remains to be 1.

<3> MFnX (auxiliary function read signal)

This signal remains to be 1 until the auxiliary function
command (G346) is executed and the auxiliary function
completion signal (FINnX) is input.

<4> BUFx (buffer full notification signal)

This signal is 1 when there is an axis command block in
the input register (wait buffer).

- 162 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

EXAMPLE
When MFnX = 1, G348 P100; results in the
following:
#100 = 8

Command signal write command (G349)

• Format
G349 Pp;
P: Command value

• Explanation
This command writes a value specified at address P as a
command signal for the corresponding PMC axis control
interface.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RSTx STPx SBKx MSBKx
x : PMC control axis number
n : Auxiliary function selection number ... this function
uses 1.

<1> RSTx (reset signal)

This signal resets the axis under control of the PMC.
It also cancels all buffered commands at the same time.

<2> STPx (axis control halt signal)

This signal stops the axis under control of the PMC.
When the signal becomes 0, the axis restarts to run.

<3> SBKx (block stop signal)

Setting this signal to 1 during execution of a command
from the PMC stops axis control when the current block
ends. Resetting it to 0 starts executing buffered
commands.

<4> MSBKx (block stop inhibit signal)

When this signal is 1, it disables SBKx.

EXAMPLE
When MFnX = 1, G348 P100; results in the
following:
#100 = 8

EXAMPLE
When RSTx = 1:
G349 P64; (64 = 01000000b)

- 163 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Machine coordinate system positioning (G350)

• Format
G350 Xx;
X: Travel distance

• Explanation
This command performs machine coordinate system
positioning for the PMC controlled axis. Address X specifies
a travel distance using an absolute position in the machine
coordinate system.

Override change (G351)

• Format
G351 Pp;
P: Override value

• Explanation
This command specifies the override to be applied to the
cutting feed for the PMC controlled axis using a value at
address P. The override is represented in percent and can
be set to any value in a range between 0% and 255%. The
specified override value remains valid until another override
change command is executed. It is set to 100%, when the
power is switched on.

6.13.3 Limitations

Command buffering
PMC-based axis control is implemented by issuing more than
one commands sequentially. So, command blocks are
buffered on the CNC side. To put another way, when the
CNC is executing a block, another command can be issued as
long as the CNC's buffer has room to receive it. Note,
however, that if the buffer has no room to receive a new
command, the new command is kept waiting while the
previous command is being executed, that is, until the
previous command is finished to create room in the buffer.
Executing G3** causes buffering; so the PMCAx (axis control
command read strobe signal) is not needed.

Auxiliary function command

The auxiliary function command can be implemented using
G346, but the auxiliary function completion signal FINnX
cannot be controlled on the macro side. It should be
controlled by the PMC.

- 164 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

Unit of data
The travel distance (dwell value) specified at address X and
the feedrate specified at address F should be represented in
the least input increment of the specified axis.

6.13.4 Cautions

CAUTIONS
1 The PMC should use only the auxiliary function
completion signal FINnX for the PMC controlled
axis used with this function.
2 When this function is performing PMC axis control,
do not issue a control command from the PMC
side. To be specific, do not issue a PMC axis
control command, for example, by causing the
conversational macro (talk macro) to use the UO
signal to inform the PMC that PMC axis control is
under way and eventually allowing the PMC to
reference this signal. Be careful especially when
a ladder or macro program is updated to add or
change a PMC axis control sequence.
3 Once this function is used to perform PMC axis
control, before causing the PMC to perform PMC
axis control to the same axis, stop the macro
program (if it has been activated) and reset the
target axis on the PMC side (set the RSTx to 1).

- 165 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

6.14 File Control

6.14.1 General

The following types of file control can be performed with the

conversational macro (talk macro) and execution macro.
1. Generating a file
2. Deleting a file
3. Reading data
4. Writing data

6.14.2 Setup procedure

File control first requires that a user file area be set up.
To set up the user file area, follow the steps below:

1. While holding down the and MDI keys,

switch on the power.
2. After the following IPL screen appears, press the 7
and keys to select "7. MACRO COMPILER
UTILITY."
IPL MENU
0. END IPL
1. DUMP MEMORY
2. DUMP FILE
3. CLEAR FILE
4. MEMORY CARD UTILITY
5. SYSTEM ALARM UTILITY
6. FILE SRAM CHECK UTILITY
7. MACRO COMPILER UTILITY
?

3. When the following macro compiler utility appears,

press the 2 and keys to select "2. USER FILE
SETTING."
MACRO COMPILER UTILITY MENU
0. END
1. USER FILE INFORMATION
2. USER FILE SETTING
3. USER FILE FORMAT
?

- 166 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

4. First, the currently set values are displayed as follows:

CURRENT DATA :
USER FILE AREA SIZE = xx
NUMBER OF USER FILE = xx
DATA AREA SIZE (BYTE) = xx
SRAM FREE = xx

5. According to the displays, specify the size of the user file

area and the number of files that can be generated in the
user file area.
MODIFY DATA :
USER FILE AREA SIZE = ?
NUMBER OF USER FILE = ?
If you want to change the data, enter the desired value,
and press the key. If not, simply press the

key. If you want to cancel the setting, press the

key.
6. When setting ends, the following message is displayed.
• If the setting has not been changed:
"DATA NOT CHANGED" is displayed.
• If setting has been completed normally:
The new setting is displayed in the same manner as at
step 4, and "DATA SETTING END" is displayed.
• If an invalid value has been specified:
"SETTING ERROR" is displayed and followed by a
description of the cause of the error.
7. Pressing the key displays the macro compiler
utility screen again.
8. After user file area setup is completed normally, perform
formatting.
On the macro compiler utility screen, press the 3 and
keys to select "3. USER FILE FORMAT."
9. When "USER FILE FORMAT OK? [Y/N]" is displayed,
press the Y key.
10. When formatting ends normally, "USER FILE
FORMAT: END" is displayed.
11. Pressing the key displays the macro compiler
utility screen again.
12. Press the 0 and keys to select "0. END."

13. When the IPL screen appears again, press the 0 and
keys to select "0. END IPL."
14. The IPL screen is exited, and a usual screen appears.
- 167 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

If you only want to check the current user file setting,

press the 1 and keys on the macro compiler
utility screen to select "1. USER FILE INFORMATION."

6.14.3 Setting

The relationships among the user file area, the number of

files that can be generated in the user file area, and the size
actually assigned to data areas are as described below:

1. The number of files that can be generated in the user file

area must be a multiple of 8. If a specified value is not
a multiple of 8, it is rounded up to the nearest multiple
of 8.
2. The size of the user file area must satisfy the following
condition.
User file area size ≥ (1 + the number of files that can be
generated in the user file area + the number of files that
can be generated in the user file area/8)
3. The size actually allotted to data areas (in bytes) is
calculated by the following expression.
Allotted size = [{user file area size - (1 + the number of
files that can be generated in the user file area/8)} × 240]
[bytes]

The maximum value that can be set as a user file area varies
with the free space in the backup memory. The size of the
backup memory free space is displayed at SRAM FREE in
step 4 of the setup procedure.
Actually, the maximum value that can be set is as follows:
(Backup memory free space + current user file area size)
The current user file area size is displayed at USER FILE
AREA in step 4 of the setup procedure.

- 168 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

EXAMPLE
[Example of setup]
<1> • User file area = 10
• If the number of files that can be generated in
the user file area = 8, the size that can be
allotted is:
[{10 - (1 + 8/8)} × 240 ] = 1920 [bytes]
<2> • User file area = 100
• If the number of files that can be generated in
the user file area = 48, the size that can be
allotted is:
[{100 - (1 + 48/8)} × 240] = 22320 [bytes]
6.14.4 Error messages

The following table lists the error messages that may be

displayed when the user file is set up.

Message Description
FILE AREA TOO LARGE A specified user file size is greater than the
maximum size that can be set up.
FILE AREA TOO SMALL The relationship between the user file area size and
the number of files that can be generated in the
user file area does not satisfy the condition stated in
item 2 above.

6.14.5 List of commands

Generating a file
Function This command generates a file.
Format FGEN (file-number, file-size, status-variable-number)
Explanation The <file-number> parameter numbers a file to be generated.
The file is accessed using this number. See Table 6.14.6 (a)
for the values that can be used as file numbers.
The <file-size> parameter specifies the size of a file to be
generated. The unit of the size is bytes.
The <status-variable-number> parameter specifies the macro
variable number to which the execution result of the command
is returned. The user must check this value. See Table
6.14.6 (e) for the status values.
Sample FGEN (200,120,100)
statement This statement generates a file that is numbered 200 and is
120 bytes large. The result of executing the statement is
returned to macro variable #100.

Deleting a file
Function This command deletes a file.
Format FDEL (file-number, status-variable number)

- 169 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Explanation The <file-number> parameter specifies a file to be deleted.

See Table 6.14.6 (a) for the values that can be used as file
numbers.
The <status-variable-number> parameter specifies the macro
variable number to which the execution result of the command
is returned. The user must check this value. See Table
6.14.6 (e) for the status values.
Caution A file that is open cannot be deleted.
Sample FDEL (200,100)
statement This statement deletes file No. 200. The result of executing
the statement is returned to macro variable #100.

- 170 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

Opening a file
Function This command opens a file.
Format FOPEN (file-number, access-mode, status-variable-number)
Explanation The <file-number> parameter specifies a file to be opened. See
Table 6.14.6 (a) for the values that can be used as file numbers.
The <access-mode> parameter specifies a read or write mode.
See Table 6.14.6 (b) for the access mode values that can be
specified.
The <status-variable-number> parameter specifies the macro
variable number to which the execution result of the command is
returned. The user must check this value. See Table 6.14.6
(e) for the status values.
This status variable number is valid also for FCLOS, FREAD,
FWRIT, and FPSET.
Caution Up to 10 files can be open at the same time.
The file open command cannot be executed for a file that is
already open.
Sample FOPEN (200,1,100)
statement This statement opens file No. 200 in both write and read modes.
The result of executing the statement is returned to macro
variable #100.

Closing a file
Function This command closes a file.
Format FCLOS (file-number)
Explanation The <file-number> parameter specifies a file to be closed. See
Table 6.14.6 (a) for the values that can be used as file numbers.
The result of executing this command is returned to the macro
variable number specified in FOPEN. The user must check this
value. See Table 6.14.6 (e) for the status values.
Sample FCLOS (200)
statement This statement closes file No. 200. The result of executing this
statement is returned to the status variable number specified
when the file was opened.

Reading data from a file

Function This command reads the contents of a file.
Format FREAD (file-number, data-type, data-variable-number)
Explanation The <file-number> parameter specifies a file to be read from.
See Table 6.14.6 (a) for the values that can be used as file
numbers.
The <data-type> parameter specifies the type of the data to be
read. See Table 6.14.6 (c) for the data type values.
The <data-variable-number> parameter specifies the number of
the macro variable to which the read data is to be assigned.
The result of executing this command is returned to the macro
variable number specified in FOPEN. The user must check this
value. See Table 6.14.6 (e) for the status values.
Caution After data is read, its pointer is updated automatically.
Sample FREAD (200,2,500)
statement The data currently indicated by the pointer of file No. 200 is read
in binary form 1 (word type) and assigned to macro variable
#500. The result of executing this statement is returned to the
status variable number specified when the file was opened.

- 171 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Writing data to a file

Function This command writes data to a file.
Format FWRIT (file-number, data-type, data)
Explanation The <file-number> parameter specifies a file to be written to.
See Table 6.14.6 (a) for the values that can be used as file
numbers.
The <data-type> parameter specifies the type of the data to be
written. See Table 6.14.6 (c) for the data type values.
The <data> parameter specifies the data to be written.
The result of executing this command is returned to the macro
variable number specified in FOPEN. The user must check
this value. See Table 6.14.6 (e) for the status values.
Caution After data is written, its pointer is updated automatically.
Sample FWRIT (200,2,123)
statement The data 123 is written to a location currently indicated by the
pointer of file No. 200 in binary form 1 (word type). The result
of executing this statement is returned to the status variable
number specified when the file was opened.

Setting a file pointer

Function This command sets a file pointer.
Format FPSET (file-number, pointer-type, pointer)
Explanation The <file-number> parameter specifies the file for which a
pointer is to be set up. See Table 6.14.6 (a) for the values that
can be used as file numbers.
The <pointer-type> parameter specifies the type of the pointer
to be set up. See Table 6.14.6 (d) for the type values.
The <pointer> specifies a desired pointer according to the
specified type.
The result of executing this command is returned to the macro
variable number specified in FOPEN. The user must check
this value. See Table 6.14.6 (e) for the status values.
Caution If pointer type 0 is specified, the <pointer> parameter is
nullified.
If pointer type 2 is specified, the positive and negative values of
the <pointer> parameter correspond to the backward and
forward directions from the current pointer, respectively.
Sample FPSET (200,2,12)
statement This statement advances the current pointer of file No. 200 by
12. The result of executing this statement is returned to the
status variable number specified when the file was opened.

- 172 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

6.14.6 Cautions

CAUTIONS
1 To read data from a file, specify the same conditions
as used when the data was written. (Satisfy the
following conditions.)
• The file pointer for reading points to the same
location as for writing.
• The data type for reading is the same as for
writing.
If the above conditions are not satisfied, the read
data may differ from the write data.
2 If the data type is binary form 1 or 2, writing <null>
data results in 0 being written.

Value Description
200 to File
999999999
Table 6.14.6 (a) File Numbers

Value Description
0 Read mode
1 Read and write mode
Table 6.14.6 (b) Access Mode Values

Value Description
0 Floating-point form (8 bytes)
2 Binary form 1 (word type: 2 bytes)
3 Binary form 2 (long type: 4 bytes)
Table 6.14.6 (c) Data Type Values

Value Description
0 Sets the pointer to the start point.
1 Sets the pointer relative to the start point.
2 Sets the pointer relative to the current location.
Table 6.14.6 (d) Pointer Type Values

- 173 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Value Description
0 Normal end
1 The specified file is missing.
2 The specified file is not open.
3 A maximum number of files that can be open at the same
time (10) are already open.
4 A maximum number of files that can be generated at the
same time (10) have already been generated.
5 The file area is already full.
6 The specified pointer is invalid.
7 The specified file size is invalid.
8 The attempt to open the file failed.
9 The specified file has not been closed.
10 The specified access mode is invalid.
11 An existing file was specified.
12 An I/O error has occurred.
13 The specified file number is invalid.
14 The specified data type is invalid.
Table 6.14.6 (e) Status Values

- 174 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

6.15 Axis-Direction-by-Axis-Direction Interlock Function

(#8605 to #8608)

The axis-direction-by-axis-direction interlock control

variables (#8605 and #8607) can be used to apply interlock
for individual axes and their movement directions. The
movement axis and direction variables for the rise time of the
SKIP signal (#8606 and #8608) can be used to detect the axis
that runs when the SKIP signal rises, and its direction.
This function is enabled when parameter XDL (bit 1 of
parameter No. 8558) = 1.
The axis-direction-by-axis-direction interlock function is
enabled only in the axis-direction-by-axis-direction interlock
mode, that is, in the JOG or HNDL mode in which the PMC
internal relay (R area) signal specified in parameter Nos.
8572 and 8573 is on.

Each digit of the binary numbers assigned to #8605 to #8608

corresponds to the movement axis and its direction. In
addition, #8605 and #8606 support the first to sixteenth axes,
and #8607 and #8608, the seventeenth to twenty-fourth axes.

#8605 and #8606 (first to sixteenth axes)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0BYTE AX4- AX4+ AX3- AX3+ AX2- AX2+ AX1- AX1+

1BYTE AX8- AX8+ AX7- AX7+ AX6- AX6+ AX5- AX5+

2BYTE AX12- AX12+ AX11- AX11+ AX10- AX10+ AX9- AX9+

3BYTE AX16- AX16+ AX15- AX15+ AX14- AX14+ AX13- AX13+

#8607 and #8608 (seventeenth to twenty-fourth axes)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0BYTE AX20- AX20+ AX19- AX19+ AX18- AX18+ AX17- AX17+

1BYTE AX24- AX24+ AX23- AX23+ AX22- AX22+ AX21- AX21+

AX1+/AX1- to AX10+/AX10- are used for standard-axis

applications.
AX1+/AX1- to AX24+/AX24- are used for multiaxis
applications.

- 175 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

EXAMPLES
1 If #8605 and #8606 have a binary number of
1000000000000001, they indicate the positive
direction of the first axis (AX1+) and the negative
direction of the eighth axis (AX8-). This binary
number is equivalent to 32769 in decimal.
2 If #8607 and #8608 have a binary number of
1000000000000001, they indicate the positive
direction of the seventeenth axis (AX17+) and the
negative direction of the twenty-fourth axis (AX24-).
This binary number is equivalent to 32769 in
decimal.

Axis-direction-by-axis-direction interlock control variables (#8605 and #8607)

When both #8605 and #8607 are 0, interlock is applied to all

axes when the SKIP signal (or, at a high-speed skip, the
high-speed skip signal) is on. Even if this function is not
used for the seventeenth axis and those assigned a higher
axis number, not only #8605 but also #8607 must be 0.
#8606 and #8608 reflect the axes that are caused to stop
when the skip signal becomes on and the direction in which
the axes were moving just before they stopped. These
control variables retain the information until the skip signal
is turned off and on again. Interlock is kept applied to the
axes and directions that correspond to the values of the
control variables. To release interlock, turn off the PMC
internal relay (R area).
If either #8605 or #8607 is not 0, interlock is applied to the
axes and directions indicated by #8605 or #8607.
#8605 supports the first to sixteenth axes, and #8607, the
seventieth to twenty-fourth axes.

NOTE
Set data in #8607 and #8605 in the stated
sequence. Interlock begins when data is set in
#8605.
Consider the following example.
#8607=32769;....(Positive direction of the
seventeenth axis, negative
direction of the twenty-fourth axis)
#8605=1;............(Positive direction of the first axis)
At this point, interlock is applied
to the first, seventeenth, and
twenty-fourth axes.

- 176 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

To release interlock, reset #8605 and #8607 to 0, or turn off

the PMC internal relay (R area) to reset these control
variables to 0. Immediately after the power is switched on,
or when the axis-direction-by-axis-direction interlock
function is disabled (parameter XDL (bit 1 of parameter No.
8558) = 0 or the PMC internal relay (R area) is off), #8605
and #8607 are 0.

Movement axis and direction variables for the rise time of the SKIP signal
(#8606 and #8608)

When the state of the SKIP signal (or, at a high-speed skip,

the high-speed skip signal) is changed from off to on, #8606
and #8608 indicate the axis that moved most recently and
the direction of its movement. #8606 supports the first to
sixteenth axes, and #8608, the seventeenth to twenty-fourth
axes.
#8606 and #8608 retains their values until the state of the
SKIP signal changes from off to on again. When the PMC
internal relay (R area) is turned off, both #8606 and #8608
are reset to 0, thereby disabling this function.

NOTE
Any value can be written to neither #8606 nor
#8608.

- 177 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

6.16 Window Function (#8996 to #8999)

6.16.1 General

The window function enables referencing of the following

system information:
1. Alarm information and external alarm information
2. Number of controlled axes and number of servo axes
3. Cumulative operation time and number of parts
4. Diagnosis information (No. 1000 and No. 1001)
5. System series information, servo series information,
and PMC series information

Window control variables

#8997: System information ID
#8998: Axis number
#8999: System information
#8996: Completion code

Method of using
Set #8997 with the ID No. of the system information to be
referenced.
If the system information depends on the controlled axis or
spindle, set #8998 with the number of the controlled axis or
spindle.
Now read-accessing #8999 enables you to view the
information about the system.
Then, #8996 indicates whether the window function was
executed normally (0 for normal end and -1 for abnormal
end).

- 178 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

EXAMPLE 1
Alarm information
(1) PS alarm (foreground) monitoring
#8997=1 ; → The system information
ID for alarms is 1.
#500=#8999 ; → Acquires alarm
information.
#500=#500 AND 2 ; → Checks for a P/S alarm
condition.
IF[#500EQ0]GOTO 90 ;
#8997=30 ; → The system information
ID for P/S alarms is 30.
#500=#8999 ; → Acquires a P/S alarm
number.
#501=#8996 ; → Sets the result of
executing this function.
N90 M99 ;
When these steps are executed, #500 is set with a
PS alarm number, then #501 is set with information
about whether the window function was executed
normally.
(2) Axis-type OT alarm monitoring
(monitoring stored stroke limit 1 for the positive
direction of the first controlled axis)
#8997= 11 ; → The ID for axis-type OT
alarm flag 1 is 11.
#8998= 1 ; → Axis number (first axis)
#500=#8999 ; → Acquires the contents of
ID No. 11.
#500=#500 AND 1 ;
#501=#8996 ; → Sets the result of
executing this function.
N90 M99 ;
When these steps are executed, #500 is set with 1 if
the tool is in the forbidden area for stored stroke
limit 1. Then #501 is set with information about
whether the window function was executed
normally.

- 179 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

EXAMPLE 2
Parts total
#8997=200 ; → The ID for the parts total
is 200.
#500= 8999 ;
#501= 8996 ; → Sets the result of
executing this function.
When these steps are executed, #500 is set with the
parts total. Then #501 is set with information
about whether the window function was executed
normally.

NOTE
#8996 is set with -1 (abnormal end) if:
• A value assigned to #8997 is invalid, or
• A value assigned to #8998 is greater than the
maximum allowable number of controlled axes or
spindles.

Lists of reference systems and the related information ID Nos.

ID No. Axis ID No.

Information
(#8997) (#8998)
1 - Alarm basic flag
2 - OH alarm flag
3 - SW alarm flag
4 - PW alarm flag
5 - OT alarm flag 1
6 - OT alarm flag 2
7 - OT alarm flag 3
8 - OT alarm flag 4
9 - IO alarm flag
10 - SV alarm flag
11 1 to the maximum allowable Axis-type OT alarm flag 1
number of controlled axes
12 1 to the maximum allowable Axis-type OT alarm flag 2
number of controlled axes
13 1 to the maximum allowable Axis-type OT alarm flag 3
number of controlled axes
14 1 to the maximum allowable Axis-type OH alarm flag
number of controlled axes
15 1 to the maximum allowable Axis-type SV alarm flag 1
number of controlled axes
16 1 to the maximum allowable Axis-type SV alarm flag 2
number of controlled axes
17 1 to the maximum allowable Axis-type SV alarm flag 3
number of controlled axes
18 1 to the maximum allowable Axis-type SV alarm flag 4
number of controlled axes
19 1 to the maximum allowable Axis-type SV alarm flag 5
number of controlled axes

- 180 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

ID No. Axis ID No.

Information
(#8997) (#8998)
30 - PS alarm number (foreground)
31 - PS alarm number (background)
32 - SR alarm number
33 - External alarm number 1
34 - External alarm number 2
35 - External alarm number 3
36 - External alarm number 4
50 - Alarm basic flag 2
51 - IO2 alarm flag
52 - SV2 alarm flag
53 1 to the maximum allowable Axis-type OT2 alarm flag
number of controlled axes
54 1 to the maximum allowable Axis-type SV2 alarm flag 1
number of controlled axes
55 1 to the maximum allowable Axis-type SV2 alarm flag 2
number of controlled axes
56 1 to the maximum allowable Axis-type SV2 alarm flag 3
number of controlled axes
57 1 to the maximum allowable Axis-type SV2 alarm flag 4
number of controlled axes
58 1 to the maximum allowable Axis-type SV2 alarm flag 5
number of controlled axes
59 - SP alarm flag
60 1 to the maximum allowable Axis-type SP alarm flag 1
number of spindle axes
61 1 to the maximum allowable Axis-type SP alarm flag 2
number of spindle axes
62 1 to the maximum allowable Axis-type SP alarm flag 3
number of spindle axes
63 1 to the maximum allowable Axis-type SP alarm flag 4
number of spindle axes
64 - MC alarm flag
100 - Number of CNC controlled axes
103 - Number of servo axes
200 - Parts total
201 - Cumulative operation time
202 - Cutting time
203 - Parts required
204 - Parts count
210 - Power-on time
224 - Free timer
300 - Diagnosis No. 1000
301 - Diagnosis No. 1001
8000 - System series information digit 4
8001 - System series information digit 3
8002 - System series information digit 2
8003 - System series information digit 1
8005 - System edition information digit 2
8006 - System edition information digit 1
8020 - Servo series information digit 4
8021 - Servo series information digit 3
8022 - Servo series information digit 2
8023 - Servo series information digit 1

- 181 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

ID No. Axis ID No.

Information
(#8997) (#8998)
8025 - Servo edition information digit 2
8026 - Servo edition information digit 1
8030 - PMC series information digit 4
8031 - PMC series information digit 3
8032 - PMC series information digit 2
8033 - PMC series information digit 1
8035 - PMC edition information digit 2
8036 - PMC edition information digit 1

Each axis ID No. (#8998) corresponds to an axis as listed

below:
• Controlled axes
First controlled axis : 1
Second controlled axis : 2
:
Twenty-fourth controlled axis : 24

• Spindles
First spindle : 1
Second spindle : 2
Third spindle : 3
Fourth spindle : 4

6.16.2 Alarm information and external alarm information

The alarm basic flag (ID No. 1) and alarm basic flag 2 (ID No.
50) indicate the category of an alarm (if occurs).
For details, see "Detail information about each alarm." Bit
information is output as 1 byte (0 to 128), 2 byte (0 to 32768),
or 4 bytes (0 to 2147483648) to #8999 (see the example given
for the alarm basic flag).

Compatibility with the FS15-B

The following alarm information is added in the FS15i.

ID No. 50 : Alarm basic flag 2 (1-byte data)
ID Nos. 51 to 63: Alarm detail bit information (4-byte
data)
ID No. 64 : MC alarm number
The alarm detail bit information for alarms that are
inherited from the FS-15B can be read using also ID Nos. 2 to
19. (However, the alarm detail bit information for the
alarms whose category was changed (for example, from OT to
SP (spindle-related alarm)) between the FS-15B and FS-15i
can be read only using ID Nos. 51 to 63.

- 182 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

NOTES
1 Information about the alarms added in the FS15i
can be read only using ID Nos. 50 to 64 (new alarm
information).
2 Some spindle-related alarms were changed in the
FS15i (OT →SP). For details, see "Detail
information about each alarm."
3 The detail bit information about an alarm that exists
in both the FS15-B and FS15i and has the same
category and number for both systems can be read
using both ID Nos. 51 to 63 (4-byte data) and ID
Nos. 2 to 19 (1-byte data), because the
corresponding bit in both data becomes 1. (See
the example given in "Detail information about
each alarm.")

FS15i original information

If an MC alarm occurs, the information indicated by the
alarm basic flag (ID No. 1) varies with the setting of
parameter 15I (bit 3 of parameter No. 8558) as follows:
• If parameter 15I (bit 3 of parameter No. 8558) = 0, the
foreground PS alarm (02h) is 1.
• If parameter 15I (bit 3 of parameter No. 8558) = 1, the
foreground PS alarm (02h) is 0.
In either case, however, the MC alarm flag (01h) in alarm
basic flag 2 (ID No. 50) is 1.

NOTE
The specifications of some macro executor
functions in parameter 15I (bit 3 of parameter No.
8558) original to the FS15i have been changed .
For details, see 9.1, "Compile Parameters."

- 183 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Alarm basic flags

ID No. Bit information
Description
(#8997) (#8999)
0001h Background PS alarm
0002h Foreground PS alarm
0004h OH alarm
0008h Undefined
0010h Undefined
0020h SW alarm
0040h OT alarm
0080h Undefined
1
0100h External alarm
0200h Undefined
0400h SR alarm
0800h Undefined
1000h SV alarm
2000h IO alarm
4000h PW alarm
8000h Undefined

Background PS alarm:
When this bit is 1, it means that the P/S
alarm number (background) is set with
data.
Foreground PS alarm:
When this bit is 1, it means that the P/S
alarm number (foreground) is set with
data.
OH alarm : When this bit is 1, it means that the OH
alarm flag or axis-type OH alarm flag is
set with data.
SW alarm : When this bit is 1, it means that the SW
alarm flag is set with data.
OT alarm : When this bit is 1, it means that the OT
alarm flags (1 to 4), axis-type OT alarm
flags (1 to 3), or axis-type OT2 flags are set
with data.
External alarm : When this bit is 1, it means that the
external alarm flags (1 to 4) are set with
data.
SR alarm : When this bit is 1, it means that the SR
alarm flag is set with data.
SV alarm : When this bit is 1, it means that the SV
alarm flag, SV2 alarm flag, axis-type SV
alarm flags (1 to 5), or axis-type SV2 flags
(1 to 5) are set with data.
IO alarm : When this bit is 1, it means that the IO
alarm flag or IO2 alarm flag is set with
data.
PW alarm : When this bit is 1, it means that the PW
alarm flag is set with data.

- 184 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

EXAMPLE
If the foreground PS alarm and external alarm have
occurred, 258 (102h) is output to #8999.

Alarm basic flag 2

ID No. Bit information
Description
(#8997) (38999)
01h MC alarm
02h Undefined
04h Undefined
08h Undefined
50
10h SP alarm
20h Undefined
40h Undefined
80h Undefined

MC alarm : When this bit is 1, it means that the MC alarm

number is set with data.
SP alarm : When this bit is 1, it means that the SP alarm
flag or axis-type SP alarm flags (1 to 4) are set
with data.

Detail information about each alarm

ID numbers used to acquire detail information about each

alarm are listed below.
For the PS, SR, MC, and external alarms, their alarm number
is output to #8999. For the other alarms, 1 byte (0 to 128), 2
bytes (0 to 32768), or 4 bytes (0 to 2147483648) of bit
information are output to #8999. For the bit information, the
related alarm number can be recognized from the
corresponding bit listed in any of the following tables.
For detailed descriptions of the alarm corresponding to each
alarm, refer to Appendix A, "Alarm List" in "FANUC Series
15i/150i-MA Operator's Manual (Programming)" (B-63324EN).
Alarm numbers inherited from the FS-15B can be read using
both ID Nos. 2 to 19 and ID Nos. 51 to 63.

EXAMPLE
The information about OT00007 can be read using
both ID No. 11 and ID No. 53.
When #8997 = 11 →#8999 = 64, and when #8997
= 53 →#8999 = 32.

- 185 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

• Alarm number information

ID No. Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
30 Foreground PS alarm number
31 Background PS alarm number
32 SR alarm number
33 External alarm No. 1
34 External alarm No. 2
35 External alarm No. 3
36 External alarm No. 4
64 MC alarm number

• Bit information
OH alarm flag
ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
01h OH0001
02h OH0002
04h Undefined
08h Undefined
2
10h Undefined
20h Undefined
40h Undefined
80h Undefined

SW alarm flag
ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
01h SW0000
02h Undefined
04h Undefined
08h Undefined
3
10h Undefined
20h Undefined
40h Undefined
80h Undefined

PW alarm flag
ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
01h PW0000
02h PW0100
04h Undefined
08h Undefined
4
10h Undefined
20h PW0102
40h PW0103
80h Undefined

- 186 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

OT alarm flag 1
ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
01h Undefined
02h Undefined
04h Undefined
08h Undefined
5
10h Undefined
20h Undefined
40h Undefined
80h Undefined

OT alarm flag 2
ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
01h Undefined
02h Undefined
04h Undefined
08h Undefined
6
10h Undefined
20h Undefined
40h Undefined
80h Undefined

OT alarm flag 3
ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
01h Undefined
02h OT0120
04h OT0121
08h OT0122
7
10h OT0123
20h OT0124
40h OT0125
80h OT0126

OT alarm flag 4
ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
01h OT0127
02h OT0128
04h OT0129
08h OT0130
8
10h OT0150
20h Undefined
40h OT0131
80h Undefined

- 187 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

IO alarm flag
ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
01h Undefined
02h Undefined
04h Undefined
08h Undefined
9
10h Undefined
20h IO0032
40h IO0030
80h Undefined

SV alarm flag
ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
01h SV0030
02h Undefined
04h Undefined
08h SV0119
10
10h SV0120
20h Undefined
40h Undefined
80h Undefined

Axis-type OT alarm flag 1

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
01h OT0001
02h OT0002
04h OT0003
08h OT0004
11
10h Undefined
20h Undefined
40h OT0007
80h OT0008

Axis-type OT alarm flag 2

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
01h OT0021
02h OT0022
04h Undefined
08h Undefined
12
10h Undefined
20h Undefined
40h Undefined
80h Undefined

- 188 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

Axis-type OT alarm flag 3

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
01h OT0151
02h OT0032
04h OT0132
08h Undefined
13
10h OT0034
20h OT0513
40h OT0030
80h OT0031

Axis-type OH alarm flag

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
01h Undefined
02h Undefined
04h Undefined
08h Undefined
14
10h Undefined
20h Undefined
40h Undefined
80h Undefined

Axis-type SV alarm flag 1

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
01h Undefined
02h Undefined
04h Undefined
08h Undefined
15
10h Undefined
20h Undefined
40h Undefined
80h Undefined

Axis-type SV alarm flag 2

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
01h SV0008
02h SV0009
04h Undefined
08h SV0011
16
10h SV0012
20h SV0013
40h SV0014
80h Undefined

- 189 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Axis-type SV alarm flag 3

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
01h Undefined
02h Undefined
04h Undefined
08h Undefined
17
10h Undefined
20h Undefined
40h Undefined
80h SV0100

Axis-type SV alarm flag 4

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
01h SV0024
02h SV0101
04h Undefined
08h Undefined
18
10h Undefined
20h Undefined
40h Undefined
80h Undefined

Axis-type SV alarm flag 5

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
01h SV0025
02h SV0026
04h SV0050
08h Undefined
19
10h Undefined
20h Undefined
40h Undefined
80h SV0027

- 190 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

IO2 alarm flag

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
00000001h Undefined
00000002h IO0001
00000004h IO0002
00000008h IO0030
00000010h IO0032
00000020h Undefined
00000040h Undefined
00000080h Undefined
00000100h Undefined
00000200h Undefined
00000400h Undefined
00000800h Undefined
00001000h Undefined
00002000h Undefined
00004000h Undefined
00008000h Undefined
51
00010000h Undefined
00020000h Undefined
00040000h Undefined
00080000h Undefined
00100000h Undefined
00200000h Undefined
00400000h Undefined
00800000h Undefined
01000000h Undefined
02000000h Undefined
04000000h Undefined
08000000h Undefined
10000000h Undefined
20000000h Undefined
40000000h Undefined
80000000h Undefined

- 191 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

SV2 alarm flag

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
00000001h Undefined
00000002h SV0030
00000004h SV0060
00000008h SV0061
00000010h SV0062
00000020h SV0063
00000040h SV0064
00000080h SV0065
00000100h SV0066
00000200h SV0067
00000400h SV0119
00000800h SV0120
00001000h SV0127
00002000h SV0128
00004000h Undefined
00008000h Undefined
52
00010000h Undefined
00020000h Undefined
00040000h Undefined
00080000h Undefined
00100000h Undefined
00200000h Undefined
00400000h Undefined
00800000h Undefined
01000000h Undefined
02000000h Undefined
04000000h Undefined
08000000h Undefined
10000000h Undefined
20000000h Undefined
40000000h Undefined
80000000h Undefined

- 192 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

Axis-type OT2 alarm flag

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
00000001h Undefined
00000002h OT0001
00000004h OT0002
00000008h OT0003
00000010h OT0004
00000020h OT0007
00000040h OT0008
00000080h OT0021
00000100h OT0022
00000200h OT0030
00000400h OT0031
00000800h OT0032
00001000h OT0034
00002000h OT0035
00004000h OT0036
00008000h OT0132
53
00010000h OT0151
00020000h OT0184
00040000h OT0449
00080000h OT0450
00100000h OT0451
00200000h OT0512
00400000h OT0513
00800000h Undefined
01000000h Undefined
02000000h Undefined
04000000h Undefined
08000000h Undefined
10000000h Undefined
20000000h Undefined
40000000h Undefined
80000000h Undefined

- 193 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Axis-type SV2 alarm flag 1

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
00000001h SV0024
00000002h SV0101
00000004h SV0008
00000008h SV0009
00000010h SV0011
00000020h SV0012
00000040h SV0013
00000080h SV0014
00000100h SV0070
00000200h SV0071
00000400h SV0072
00000800h SV0073
00001000h SV0074
00002000h Undefined
00004000h SV0125
00008000h SV0126
54
00010000h SV0109
00020000h SV0409
00040000h Undefined
00080000h Undefined
00100000h SV0100
00200000h SV0350
00400000h Undefined
00800000h Undefined
01000000h Undefined
02000000h Undefined
04000000h Undefined
08000000h Undefined
10000000h Undefined
20000000h Undefined
40000000h Undefined
80000000h Undefined

- 194 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

Axis-type SV2 alarm flag 2

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
00000001h SV0430
00000002h SV0431
00000004h SV0432
00000008h SV0433
00000010h SV0434
00000020h SV0435
00000040h SV0436
00000080h SV0437
00000100h SV0438
00000200h SV0439
00000400h SV0440
00000800h SV0441
00001000h SV0442
00002000h SV0443
00004000h SV0444
00008000h SV0445
55
00010000h SV0446
00020000h SV0447
00040000h SV0448
00080000h SV0449
00100000h SV0360
00200000h SV0361
00400000h SV0363
00800000h SV0364
01000000h SV0365
02000000h SV0366
04000000h SV0367
08000000h SV0368
10000000h SV0369
20000000h SV0380
40000000h SV0381
80000000h SV0382

- 195 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Axis-type SV2 alarm flag 3

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
00000001h SV0383
00000002h SV0384
00000004h SV0385
00000008h SV0386
00000010h SV0421
00000020h Undefined
00000040h Undefined
00000080h Undefined
00000100h Undefined
00000200h Undefined
00000400h Undefined
00000800h Undefined
00001000h Undefined
00002000h Undefined
00004000h Undefined
00008000h Undefined
56
00010000h Undefined
00020000h Undefined
00040000h Undefined
00080000h Undefined
00100000h Undefined
00200000h Undefined
00400000h Undefined
00800000h Undefined
01000000h Undefined
02000000h Undefined
04000000h Undefined
08000000h Undefined
10000000h Undefined
20000000h Undefined
40000000h Undefined
80000000h Undefined

- 196 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

Axis-type SV2 alarm flag 4

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
00000001h SV0025
00000002h SV0026
00000004h SV0027
00000008h SV0055
00000010h SV0056
00000020h Undefined
00000040h Undefined
00000080h Undefined
00000100h Undefined
00000200h Undefined
00000400h Undefined
00000800h Undefined
00001000h Undefined
00002000h Undefined
00004000h Undefined
00008000h Undefined
57
00010000h Undefined
00020000h Undefined
00040000h Undefined
00080000h Undefined
00100000h Undefined
00200000h Undefined
00400000h Undefined
00800000h Undefined
01000000h Undefined
02000000h Undefined
04000000h Undefined
08000000h Undefined
10000000h Undefined
20000000h Undefined
40000000h Undefined
80000000h Undefined

- 197 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Axis-type SV2 alarm flag 5

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
00000001h Undefined
00000002h SV0040
00000004h SV0041
00000008h SV0050
00000010h SV0075
00000020h SV0076
00000040h Undefined
00000080h Undefined
00000100h Undefined
00000200h Undefined
00000400h Undefined
00000800h Undefined
00001000h Undefined
00002000h Undefined
00004000h Undefined
00008000h Undefined
58
00010000h Undefined
00020000h Undefined
00040000h Undefined
00080000h Undefined
00100000h Undefined
00200000h Undefined
00400000h Undefined
00800000h Undefined
01000000h Undefined
02000000h Undefined
04000000h Undefined
08000000h Undefined
10000000h Undefined
20000000h Undefined
40000000h Undefined
80000000h Undefined

- 198 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

SP alarm flag
ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
00000001h Undefined
00000002h SP0201
00000004h SP0202
00000008h SP0996
00000010h SP0997
00000020h SP0998
00000040h SP0999
00000080h Undefined
00000100h Undefined
00000200h Undefined
00000400h Undefined
00000800h Undefined
00001000h Undefined
00002000h Undefined
00004000h Undefined
00008000h Undefined
59
00010000h Undefined
00020000h Undefined
00040000h Undefined
00080000h Undefined
00100000h Undefined
00200000h Undefined
00400000h Undefined
00800000h Undefined
01000000h Undefined
02000000h Undefined
04000000h Undefined
08000000h Undefined
10000000h Undefined
20000000h Undefined
40000000h Undefined
80000000h Undefined

- 199 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Axis-type SP alarm flag 1

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
00000001h Undefined
00000002h SP0001
00000004h SP0002
00000008h SP0003
00000010h SP0004
00000020h SP0005
00000040h SP0006
00000080h SP0007
00000100h SP0008
00000200h SP0009
00000400h SP0010
00000800h SP0011
00001000h SP0012
00002000h SP0013
00004000h SP0014
00008000h SP0015
60
00010000h SP0016
00020000h SP0017
00040000h SP0018
00080000h SP0019
00100000h SP0020
00200000h SP0021
00400000h SP0022
00800000h SP0023
01000000h SP0024
02000000h SP0025
04000000h SP0026
08000000h SP0027
10000000h SP0028
20000000h SP0029
40000000h SP0030
80000000h SP0031

- 200 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

Axis-type SP alarm flag 2

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
00000001h SP0032
00000002h SP0033
00000004h SP0034
00000008h SP0035
00000010h SP0036
00000020h SP0037
00000040h SP0038
00000080h SP0039
00000100h SP0040
00000200h SP0041
00000400h SP0042
00000800h SP0043
00001000h SP0044
00002000h SP0045
00004000h SP0046
00008000h SP0047
61
00010000h SP0048
00020000h SP0049
00040000h SP0050
00080000h SP0051
00100000h SP0052
00200000h SP0053
00400000h SP0054
00800000h SP0055
01000000h SP0056
02000000h SP0057
04000000h SP0058
08000000h SP0059
10000000h SP0220
20000000h SP0221
40000000h SP0222
80000000h SP0223

- 201 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Axis-type SP alarm flag 3

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
00000001h SP0224
00000002h SP0225
00000004h SP0226
00000008h SP0227
00000010h SP0228
00000020h SP0229
00000040h SP0230
00000080h SP0231
00000100h SP0232
00000200h SP0233
00000400h SP0234
00000800h SP0235
00001000h SP0236
00002000h SP0237
00004000h SP0238
00008000h SP0239
62
00010000h SP0240
00020000h SP0241
00040000h SP0242
00080000h SP0968
00100000h SP0969
00200000h SP0970
00400000h SP0971
00800000h SP0972
01000000h SP0973
02000000h SP0974
04000000h SP0975
08000000h SP0976
10000000h SP0977
20000000h SP0978
40000000h SP0979
80000000h SP0980

- 202 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

Axis-type SP alarm flag 4

ID No. Bit information
Alarm number
(#8997) (#8999)
00000001h SP0981
00000002h SP0982
00000004h SP0983
00000008h SP0984
00000010h SP0985
00000020h SP0986
00000040h SP0987
00000080h SP0988
00000100h SP0989
00000200h Undefined
00000400h Undefined
00000800h Undefined
00001000h Undefined
00002000h Undefined
00004000h Undefined
00008000h Undefined
63
00010000h Undefined
00020000h Undefined
00040000h Undefined
00080000h Undefined
00100000h Undefined
00200000h Undefined
00400000h Undefined
00800000h Undefined
01000000h Undefined
02000000h Undefined
04000000h Undefined
08000000h Undefined
10000000h Undefined
20000000h Undefined
40000000h Undefined
80000000h Undefined

- 203 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

6.16.3 The number of controlled axes and the number of servo axes

The number of CNC controlled axes and the number of servo

axes are output using ID Nos. 100 and 103, respectively.

EXAMPLE
If #8997 = 100, 6 read into #8999 indicates that the
number of CNC controlled axes is 6. In this case,
parameter No. 9000 is 6.

6.16.4 Cumulative operation time and parts count

The following statuses are output.

• ID No. 200: Parts total
• ID No. 201: Cumulative operation time
• ID No. 202: Cutting time
• ID No. 203: Parts required
• ID No. 204: Parts count
• ID No. 210: Power-on time
• ID No. 224: Free timer

Information read using ID No. 200 : Value of parameter No.

0107
Information read using ID No. 201 : Sum of values of
parameter Nos. 0101
and 0102 (in hours)
Information read using ID No. 202 : Sum of values of
parameter Nos. 0103
and 0104 (in hours)
Information read using ID No. 203 : Value of parameter No.
0109
Information read using ID No. 204 : Value of parameter No.
0108
Information read using ID No. 210 : Value of parameter No.
0100 (in minutes)
Information read using ID No. 224 : Sum of values of
parameter Nos. 0105
and 0106 (in hours)

EXAMPLE
If #8997 = 202, 1 read into #8999 indicates a
cutting time of 1 hour. In this case, parameter
Nos. 0103 an 0104 are 0 and 60, respectively.

- 204 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

6.16.5 Diagnosis information

The states of diagnosis Nos. 1000 and 1001 are output using
ID Nos. 300 and 301, respectively.
The output data is one byte of bit information, that is, an
integer ranging from 0 to 128.

The following tables list the detail bit information of

diagnosis Nos. 1000 and 1001.

Information Read Using ID No. 300 (Diagnosis No. 1000)

Bit information Description
01h An in-position check is in progress.
02h The feedrate override value is 0%.
03h The jog feedrate override value is 0%.
04h Interlock/start lock is on.
05h The speed arrival signal is being awaited to become on.
06h The spindle one revolution signal is being awaited during
threading.
07h The position coder is being awaited to rotate during
spindle feed per revolution.
08h Feed is at a rest.

Information Read Using ID No. 301 (Diagnosis No. 1001)

Bit information Description
01h Foreground data input is in progress.
02h Background data input is in progress.
03h Undefined
04h Undefined
05h Undefined
06h Undefined
07h Undefined
08h Undefined

EXAMPLE
If #8997 = 300, 96 (60h) read into #8999 means
that the spindle one revolution signal is being
awaited during threading and the position coder is
being awaited to rotate during spindle feed per
revolution.

- 205 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

6.16.6 System, servo, and PMC series information

System series information, servo series information, and

PMC series information are output using ID Nos. 8000 to
8006, ID Nos. 8020 to 8026, and ID Nos. 8030 to 8036,
respectively.
Each output value is a decimal representation of ASCII code.
• ID No. 8000: System series information digit 4
• ID No. 8001: System series information digit 3
• ID No. 8002: System series information digit 2
• ID No. 8003: System series information digit 1
• ID No. 8005: System edition information digit 2
• ID No. 8006: System edition information digit 1

• ID No. 8020: Servo series information digit 4

• ID No. 8021: Servo series information digit 3
• ID No. 8022: Servo series information digit 2
• ID No. 8023: Servo series information digit 1
• ID No. 8025: Servo edition information digit 2
• ID No. 8026: Servo edition information digit 1

• ID No. 8030: PMC series information digit 4

• ID No. 8031: PMC series information digit 3
• ID No. 8032: PMC series information digit 2
• ID No. 8033: PMC series information digit 1
• ID No. 8035: PMC edition information digit 2
• ID No. 8036: PMC edition information digit 1

- 206 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

EXAMPLE
Assume the following for a system of series NW10
and edition 01:
#8997=8000 ;
#500=#8999 ; → Saves system series information
digit 4
#8997=8001 ;
#501=#8999 ; → Saves system series information
digit 3
#8997=8002 ;
#502=#8999 ; → Saves system series information
digit 2
#8997=8003 ;
#503=#8999 ; → Saves system series information
digit 1
#8997=8005 ;
#504=#8999 ; → Saves system edition information
digit 2
#8997=8006 ;
#505=#8999 ; → Saves system edition information
digit 1
#500, #501, #502, and #503 are set with 78, 87,
49, and 48, respectively. The hexadecimal
representations of these values are 4Eh, 57h, 31h,
and 30h, respectively; so it turns out that digit 4 =
N, digit 3 = W, digit 2 = 1, and digit 1 = 0.
Similarly, #504 and #505 are set with 48 and 49,
respectively. The hexadecimal representations of
these values are 30h and 31h, respectively; so it
turns out that digit 2 = 0 and digit 1 = 1.

- 207 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

6.17 Function for Searching Data Tables for Control Variables

This function searches a data table, which contains sets of

consecutive control variables, for a control variable that
satisfies a specified condition. If it finds the target control
variable, it returns the data table set number where the
target control variable is contained.
The function can read the following data:

Format
Input
#8530 : Start control variable number in the search target
data table (setting: 1 or greater)
#8651 : The number of macro variables that forms a set in
the data table (setting: 1 or greater)
#8652 : The number of search target data table sets
(setting: 1 or greater)
#8653 : Lower limit to the search value (sign and decimal
point can be entered)
#8654 : Upper limit to the search value (sign and decimal
point can be entered)
G400 : Search execution (searches for control variable X
that satisfies: #8653 ≤X ≤#8654)

Output
#8655 : The data table set number where a control variable
that satisfies the search condition is contained (0 or
greater), or
= -1: There is no control variable that satisfies the
condition.
= -2: The setting of any of #8650 to #8652 is
invalid (0 or less has been set).
= -3: #8653 ≤#8654 is not satisfied.
#8650 : Start control variable number in the set next to the
retrieved data table set number (#8655)
#8652 : Set value minus the number of sets that have
already been retrieved

- 208 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

NOTES
1 If #8655 = -1:
#8650 = 1 (next control variable number in the
search target data table)
#8652 = 0
2 The set number begins with 0, but the minimum
value of #8652 (the number of search data table
sets) is 1.
3 If more than one control variable satisfies the
search condition, a search ends by returning the
data table set number that contains the first control
variable to be found.
4 Only #8655 is a read-only variable.

EXAMPLE
Data table
#40000
#8650=40000 ;
#8651=10 ;
#8652=400 ;
Set 0 #8653=10.5 ;
#8654=11.5 ;
#G400 ;
#40010 #100=#8655 ;
With the above steps, this function
searches the data table shown at the
left, in which the first control variable
begins with #40000 and ten control
variables form one set, for a control
Set 1
variable that satisfies the condition
10.5 ≤ X ≤ 11.5. If it finds such a
control variable, it returns the set
number where the control variable is
contained, using #8655. If no such
control variable is found, -1 is
returned.
If X = #40011 (set 1), for example, executing G400
results in:
#8655 = 1 : Set 1
#8650 = 40020 : Start control variable number
in set 2
#8652 = 398 : 400 - 2

- 209 -
6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS B-63323EN-2/01

Combining with array-type references

Combining this function with array-type references makes it

easy to reference the data table.

EXAMPLE
If the previous sample program is combined with
array-type references:
#8513=1 ;
#8516=10 ; *1)
#8517=1 ;
#8518=1 ; *2)
#8519=40000 ; *3)
#8650=40000 ;
#8651=10 ;
#8652=400 ;
#8653=10.5 ;
#8654=11.5 ;
G400 ;
IF[#8655 LT 0] GOTO 999 ;
---------- Go to the remaining
search processing
#8512=#8655 + 1 ; *4)
:
The data table elements of a set that was retrieved
can be referenced using #1 to #99 provided that
#8512, #8518, and #8519 will not be changed.
#8519=#8650 ; *5)
G400 ;
IF [#8655 LT 0] GOTO 999 ;
---------- Go to the remaining
search processing
#8512=#8655 + 1 ;

- 210 -
B-63323EN-2/01 6.MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS

NOTES
*1) Specifies the number of elements of a data table
set (number of control variables). The array-
type references that can be used are only #1 to
#99; so the maximum allowable number of
elements is 99.
*2) Before starting to make array-type references, set
#8518 = 1. #1 to #99 function as array-type
reference variables while #8518 = 1.
*3) Sets the start macro variable number of an array.
*4) Sets an array number (set number + 1) to be
used for array-type references.
This associates #1 to #99 as follows:
#1: = #[0 + [#8519 + [#8512 -1] * #8516]]
#2: = #[1 + [#8519 + [#8512 -1] * #8516]]
#3: = #[2 + [#8519 + [#8512 -1] * #8516]]
As many definitions as the number of elements
set in #8516 follow.
*5) To continue the second or subsequent searches,
just change the start macro variable number of the
array; array-type references can be continued
accordingly.

Cautions
CAUTIONS
1 This function is valid only with the conversational
macro (talk macro) and auxiliary macro functions.
2 The macro variable numbers in the search target
data table must be consecutive. Otherwise, a
search cannot be performed correctly. In
addition, be careful not to specify a nonexisting
control variable number or system variable as a
search target.
3 A search target control variable can be either a
custom macro variable or macro compiler-only
variable.

- 211 -
7.DEBUGGING FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

7 DEBUGGING FUNCTION

- 212 -
B-63323EN-2/01 7.DEBUGGING FUNCTION

7.1 General

The debugging function allows debugging of conversational

macros (talk macros) and auxiliary macros. When the
conversational macro (talk macro) function is executed, the
debugger starts, displaying a debugger screen on the
conversational macro (talk macro) screen. The debugger
has the following functions:

(1) Displaying the operation status

(2) Displaying the program number of an executed P-CODE
macro
(3) Displaying the sequence number of an executed P-CODE
macro
(4) Displaying the number of blocks in an executed P-CODE
macro
(5) Single-block execution
(6) Break function
Break by program number
Break by sequence number
Break by the number of executed blocks
Break by iteration count
(7) Displaying and setting macro variables (five variables)
(8) Changing targets
(9) Temporarily erasing the debugger screen and re-
displaying it
(10) Displaying error information regarding an executed P-
CODE macro

Single-block execution and break conditions can also be set

directly by pressing an appropriate key instead of setting
from the debugger screen.

NOTES
1 When using the debugging function, set bit 3
(DBG) of parameter No. 8502 to 1.
2 When the debugging function is used, entering
data form the keyboard displays the data in the
data input line even if the content of the data input
control variable (#8502) is 0.

- 213 -
7.DEBUGGING FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

7.2 Displaying and Setting on the Debugger Screen

This section explains the procedures for displaying the

debugger screen and making settings on the screen.

Displaying the debugger screen

Press function key CUSTOM to execute the conversational macro

(talk macro) function.

Debugger screen

The following items are displayed:

(1) Whether to enable key input
When key input from the debugger is enabled, INPUT is
indicated.
(2) Operation condition
The operation condition of a target P-CODE macro is
indicated by blinking. While the P-CODE macro is
being executed, EXEC is indicated. When the macro is
stopped, STOP is indicated.
(3) Program number
The program number with which the target P-CODE
macro has been executed is indicated.
(4) Sequence number
The sequence number with which the target P-CODE
macro has been executed is indicated.

- 214 -
B-63323EN-2/01 7.DEBUGGING FUNCTION

(5) Number of blocks

The number of blocks executed by the target P-CODE
macro is indicated with a value up to 99999999.
(6) Error information
Error information about the execution of the target P-
CODE macro is displayed.

ERROR a-bbbbbb-ccccc

a : 0 No error
1 An error occurred in macro statement specification.
2 An error occurred in NC statement specification.
bbbbbb : • For a macro statement, a variable number is
indicated. (For other than variables, 0 is indicated.)
• For an NC statement, a G code is indicated. (For
other than G code, 0 is indicated.)
When there is no error, 0 is indicated.
ccccc : Error No.
When there is no error, 0 is indicated.
For details of errors, see Section 10.1, "Error No. List."
(7) Target
The currently selected target is indicated.
(8) Single-block execution status
For single-block execution, ON is indicated. For
continuous operation, OFF is indicated.
(9) Break function status
When the break function is enabled, ON is indicated.
When the break function is disabled, OFF is indicated.
(10) Break conditions
Program number by which a break is caused
Sequence number by which a break is caused
Number of blocks by which a break is caused
Iteration count by which a break is caused
(11) Macro variables (five variables)
The macro variables with set numbers are indicated.
When P-CODE macro execution is stopped by single-
block execution or the break function, the macro
variables are re-displayed automatically.

NOTES
1 The number of executed blocks is preset to 0 when
the program end command (M99<Pp>) has been
executed in the main program of the P-CODE
macro.
2 When no sequence number is assigned to a block
in the P-CODE macro, the sequence number of the
previously executed block is indicated.

- 215 -
7.DEBUGGING FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

• Temporarily erasing and displaying

the debugger screen
The debugger screen can be erased and displayed
temporarily.

Press SHIFT and 3 . The debugger screen is erased and

re-displayed alternately.

NOTE
When a character card is mounted, the part hidden
by the debugger screen is not displayed even after
the debugger screen is erased.

Setting from the debugger screen

When setting single-block execution and break conditions,

switch the key input mode to key input from the debugger.
Then, use cursor keys to move the cursor
to an item you want to set.

Key input switching

To perform key input switching, press SHIFT and 2 .
When the key input mode has been changed, INPUT appears
on the debugger screen.

Press SHIFT and .

Conversation
al macro (talk Debugger
macro) input input enabled
enabled

INPUT on the debugger INPUT appears on the

screen disappears. debugger screen.

NOTE
When a P-CODE macro is stopped by single-block
execution or the break function, the key input mode
switches to the debugger input automatically.

- 216 -
B-63323EN-2/01 7.DEBUGGING FUNCTION

Setting a target
Set a P-CODE macro to be debugged. The P-CODE macro
must be in the stopped state. If the P-CODE macro is not
stopped, set single-block execution to ON to stop the macro.
To set a target, move the cursor to the target, then
Press INPUT . Pressing INPUT selects the conversational
macro (talk macro) and auxiliary macro alternately.

Immediately after power is turned on, the conversational

macro (talk macro) is initially selected. Later, the target set
with the debugger is selected.

NOTE
When switching between targets is performed,
execution of the P-CODE macro that has been set
as the target so far starts. For a new target P-
CODE macro, single-block execution and the break
function are enabled.

Single-block execution
Enable single-block execution (set to ON). Move the cursor
to OFF in the single-block execution field. Press INPUT to set
ON. To reset the setting to OFF, press INPUT again. When
the setting is changed to ON during P-CODE macro
execution, the execution stops. To re-execute the macro,
press SHIFT and 1 .

Break function
P-CODE macro execution must be in the stopped state.
Move the cursor to the break condition you want to set.
Type a value, then press INPUT . Next, move the cursor to
OFF in the break condition field. Press INPUT to change the
setting to ON. To reset the setting to OFF, press INPUT

again. To re-execute the P-CODE macro, press SHIFT and

1 .

The relationship among break conditions is shown in the

figure below. When the status of the P-CODE macro being
executed matches the break conditions, the execution of the
P-CODE macro is stopped. When 0 is set in a break
condition, that condition is excluded from the break
conditions.

- 217 -
7.DEBUGGING FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

Program No.
AND

Sequence No.
OR
AND
Stop
Number of blocks

Iteration count

NOTES
1 The number of executed blocks is preset to 0 when
the program end command (M99<Pp>) has been
executed in the main program of the P-CODE
macro.
2 When no sequence number is assigned to a block
in the P-CODE macro, the sequence number of the
previously executed block is used to make a
decision on a break.

Restarting a P-CODE macro

To restart a P-CODE macro that has been stopped by single-
block execution or the break function, press SHIFT and 1 .

NOTE
When the target is a conversational macro (talk
macro), an execution restart automatically causes
key input to switch from the debugger to
conversational macro (talk macro).

Setting macro variables

Move the cursor to a number, type a new number, and press
INPUT .

Move the cursor to a value, type a new value, and press INPUT .

NOTE
Input of EMPTY is not allowed.

- 218 -
B-63323EN-2/01 7.DEBUGGING FUNCTION

7.3 Direct Setting by Parameter and Key

Break condition setting

by parameter
If a non-zero value is set in parameter No. 8547 or 8548,
break conditions are set as follows according to the
parameter setting and the break function is enabled (ON)
when the conversational macro (talk macro) function has
been executed to start the debugger:

• Program number to cause a break : Parameter No. 8547

• Sequence number to cause a break: Parameter No. 8548

Single-block execution
by parameter
If bit 2 (SBK) of parameter No. 8502 is set to 1, single-block
execution is enabled (ON) when the conversational macro
(talk macro) function has been executed to start the
debugger.

Single-block execution
by key
If the debugger has been started by executing the
conversational macro (talk macro) function, single-block
execution is enabled (ON) and disabled (OFF) alternately by
pressing SHIFT and 4 .

Break condition setting

by key input
If the debugger has been started by executing the
conversational macro (talk macro) function and the target P-
CODE macro is in the stopped state, break conditions can be
set, and the break function can be enabled (ON) by following
the steps explained below.

(1) Type break conditions.

• For a program number (Oxxxxxxxx)
• For a sequence number (Nxxxxxxxx)
• For the number of blocks (Bxxxxxxxx)
• For an iteration count (Lxxxxxxxx)
SHIFT 5
(2) Press and .

When SHIFT and 5 are pressed without inputting any

break condition, the break function is disabled (OFF).

- 219 -
7.DEBUGGING FUNCTION B-63323EN-2/01

Debugging an auxiliary
macro
The auxiliary macro function allows an auxiliary macro to be
executed immediately after the CNC is turned on if the
program number of the auxiliary macro is set in the auxiliary
macro control variable (#8600). To debug an auxiliary
macro starting with the first block, follow the steps explained
below.
(1) Set bit 4 (VAR) of parameter No. 8502 to 1 to display the
P-CODE macro variable screen.
(2) On the P-CODE macro variable screen, set 0 in #8600.
(3) Start the debugger, and enable single-block execution
(ON).
(4) Change the target to the auxiliary macro.
(5) In #8600, set the program number of the auxiliary macro
you want to execute. Then, the first block of the
auxiliary macro is executed then stopped.

- 220 -
B-63323EN-2/01 8.OPERATION

8 OPERATION

- 221 -
8.OPERATION B-63323EN-2/01

8.1 Displaying and Setting Values in Macro Variables

Besides the custom macro variable screen, the P-CODE

macro variable screen is provided. On the P-CODE macro
variable screen, the values of the following variables are
displayed and set:

Variable
Type Remarks
No.
#1 to 33 Local variables for a Local variables for the current nest
conversational macro are displayed. (For conversational
(talk macro) macros (talk macros), the local
variables only for nest 0 are
#1 to 33 Local variables for an displayed.)
auxiliary macro Display of these variables and display
of array type variables are mutually
exclusive.
#1 to 99 Array type variables Display of these variables and display
of local variables are mutually
exclusive.
#100 to Volatile common Variables for the P-CODE macro or
199 variables custom macro is displayed according
to bits 0 and 1 (MV0 and MV1) of
parameter No. 8503.
#200 to Nonvolatile common Variables for the P-CODE macro or
999 variables custom macro is displayed according
to bits 2 to 7 of parameter No. 8503
and bits 1 to 3 of parameter No. 8504
(MV2 to MVA).
#8500 to Control variables
8999
#30000 to P-CODE variables P-CODE variables as many as the
39999 number of variables set in bit 1 (EV2)
of parameter No. 8509 and parameter
No. 8549 are displayed.
#40000 to Extended P-CODE Extended P-CODE variables as many
99099 variables as the number of variables set in bit 0
(EV1) of parameter No. 8509 and
parameter No. 8550.
#99100 to Volatile custom macro Also used as custom macro common
99199 common variables variables.
#99200 to Nonvolatile custom macro Also used as custom macro common
99999 common variables variables.

- 222 -
B-63323EN-2/01 8.OPERATION

Displaying macro variable values

The P-CODE MACRO variable screen is displayed by using

one of the following methods:

Method 1
Press function key several times until the P-CODE
MACRO variable screen appears.

Method 2
(1) Press function key .
(2) Press the CHAPTER key repeatedly until soft key
[P-CODE MACRO] is displayed.
(3) Press soft key [P-CODE MACRO].

NOTE
This screen is displayed according to the setting of
bit 4 (VAR) of parameter No. 8502.

P-CODE MACRO variable

screen
Macro variable numbers and their values are displayed.

- 223 -
8.OPERATION B-63323EN-2/01

P-CODE MACRO variable screen

(#500 to #549 and #99500 to #99549)

Variable names are displayed.

NOTE
For #500 to #549, variable names are displayed only
when bit 2 (MV3) of parameter No. 8503 indicates
that these variables are also used as custom macro
common variables. For #99500 to #99550,
variable names are always displayed.

- 224 -
B-63323EN-2/01 8.OPERATION

Values of variables
The values of variables are displayed depending on
conditions as follows:

Condition Display of variable value

Macro variable value is empty. Displayed as DATA EMPTY.
Write to macro variable is permitted. When selected by the cursor, the
variable value is indicated in reverse
video in yellow.
Read-protected or unavailable Blank
macro variable

NOTE
Even when write to a common variable is permitted,
the variable value is not displayed in reverse video in
yellow if the variable is protected with the following
parameters:
Parameter Nos. 7036 to 7039: For custom macro
common variables
Parameter Nos. 8574 to 8577: For P-CODE
macro common
variables
For parameters for custom macro common
variables, refer to "FANUC Series 15i/150i-MA
Parameter Manual" (B-63330EN).

When, as a result of operation, the value of a variable cannot

be displayed, it is displayed as follows:

Range of variable value Display of variable value

0 < Variable value < +0.00000000001 + underflow
0 > Variable value > -0.00000000001 - underflow
Variable value > 999999999999 + overflow
Variable value < -999999999999 - overflow

- 225 -
8.OPERATION B-63323EN-2/01

Setting a value in a variable

A value can be set only in those macro variables that are

permitted to be written to.

Setting a mode
Set the MDI mode. Alternatively, press the emergency stop
button to place the system in the emergency stop state.

Moving the cursor

Move the cursor to the macro variable you want to set.
Method 1
Use page keys PAGE PAGE and cursor keys

to move the cursor.

Method 2
(1) Press soft key [NUMBER SEARCH].
(2) Type the number of a macro variable.
(3) Press soft key [EXEC].

Method 3
(1) Type the number of a macro variable.
(2) Press soft key [NUMBER SEARCH].

Inputting a value
(absolute input)
Method 1
(1) Press soft key [INPUT].
(2) Type the value you want to set.
(3) Press soft key [EXEC].

Method 2
(1) Type the value you want to set.
(2) Press soft key [INPUT].

Method 3
(1) Type the value you want to set.
(2) Press the INPUT key.

Inputting a value
(incremental input)
Method 1
(1) Press soft key [+INPUT].
(2) Type the amount by which you want to increase or
decrease the current setting.
(3) Press soft key [EXEC].

- 226 -
B-63323EN-2/01 8.OPERATION

Method 2
(1) Type the amount by which you want to increase or
decrease the current setting.
(2) Press soft key [+INPUT].

Inputting EMPTY
Press soft key [INPUT EMPTY].
As the value of the variable, DATA EMPTY is indicated.

Clearing to zero
Common variables (#100 to #999), P-CODE variables
(#30000 and up), extended P-CODE variables (#40000 and
up) can be cleared to zero at a time.

When clearing all common variables, P-CODE variables, and

extended P-CODE variables to zero
(1) Press soft key [ALL CLEAR]. Operation guide keys
are then indicated as soft keys.
(2) Press soft key [ALL]

When clearing only volatile common variables (#100 to #199)

to zero
(1) Press soft key [ALL CLEAR]. Operation guide keys
are then indicated as soft keys.
(2) Press soft key [COMMON VOL.].

When clearing only nonvolatile common variables (#200 to

#999) to zero
(1) Press soft key [ALL CLEAR]. Operation guide keys
are then indicated as soft keys.
(2) Press soft key [COMMON NONVOL].

NOTES
1 The common variables protected by the following
parameters are not cleared:
Parameter Nos. 7036 to 7039: For custom macro
common variables
Parameter Nos. 8574 to 8577: For P-CODE
macro common
variables
For parameters for custom macro common
variables, refer to "FANUC Series 15i/150i-MA
Parameter Manual" (B-63330EN).
2 Custom macro common variables (#99100 to
#99999) are also cleared if the custom macro is
selected by bits 0 to 7 of parameter No. 8503 and
bits 1 to 3 of parameter No. 8504 (MV0 to MVA).

- 227 -
8.OPERATION B-63323EN-2/01

When clearing only P-CODE variables (#30000 and up) to

zero
(1) Press soft key [ALL CLEAR]. Operation guide keys
are then indicated as soft keys.
(2) Press soft key [P-CODE VARIA.].

When clearing only extended P-CODE variables (#40000 and

up) to zero
(1) Press soft key [ALL CLEAR]. Operation guide keys
are then indicated as soft keys.
(2) Press soft key [EXTEN. P-CODE].

Input/output of the values of variables

The values of the macro variables listed below can be output

to the external input/output device. These values can also
be input from the external input/output device.

Variable
Type Remarks
No.
#100 to Volatile common P-CODE macro or custom macro
199 variables variables are output according to bits
0 and 1 (MV0 and MV1) of parameter
No. 8503.
#200 to Nonvolatile common P-CODE macro or custom macro
999 variables variables are output according to bits
2 to 7 of parameter No. 8503 and bits
1 to 3 of parameter No. 8504 (MV2 to
MVA).
#30000 to P-CODE variables Variables as many as the number set
39999 by bit 1 (EV2) of parameter No. 8509
and parameter No. 8549 are output.
#40000 to Extended P-CODE Variables as many as the number set
99099 variables by bit 0 (EV1) of parameter No. 8509
and No. 8550 are output.

Outputting the values of

variables
Macro variables stored in CNC memory are output to the
external input/output device.

• Output procedure
Method 1 (when specifying neither output file nor file
number)
(1) Press soft key [PUNCH].
(2) Press soft key [ALL VARIA.].

- 228 -
B-63323EN-2/01 8.OPERATION

Method 2 (when specifying an output file name)

(1) Press soft key [PUNCH].
(2) Press soft key ["FILE NAME].
(3) Type a file name.
(4) Press soft key [FILE NAME"].
(5) Press soft key [ALL VARIA.].

Method 3 (when specifying a file number (1))

(1) Press soft key [PUNCH].
(2) Press soft key [(FILE#)].
(3) Type a file number.
(4) Press soft key [ALL VARIA.].

Method 4 (when specifying a file number (2))

(1) Press soft key [PUNCH].
(2) Press address key .
(3) Type a file number.
(4) Press soft key [ALL VARIA.].

Method 5 (when specifying a file number (3))

(1) Press address key .
(2) Type a file number.
(3) Press soft key [PUNCH].

• Output format
The values of macro variables are output as the hexadecimal
bit images of double-precision floating-point data.

%
G10L85P200(0000000000000000) When value is 0
G10L85P201(0000000000000000)
G10L85P202(FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF) When value is <empty>
•
G10L86P300(0000000000000000) When value is 0
G10L86P301(0000000000000000)
G10L86P302(FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF) When value is <empty>
•
G10L85P500(4024000000000000) For normal value
G10L85P501(4021000000000000)
G10L85P502(0000000000000000)
•
SETVN500[P-CODE00] Variable name
SETVN501[P-CODE01]
SETVN502[P-CODE02]
•
M02
%

- 229 -
8.OPERATION B-63323EN-2/01

NOTE
The portion SETVN500[...] to 549[...] is output only
when custom macro common variables are set by bit
2 (MV3) of parameter No. 8503.

G10L numbers have the following meanings:

G10L number Meaning Remarks

L85 Custom macro data When custom macros are
• Volatile common selected by bits 0 to 7 of
variable parameter No. 8503 and
• Nonvolatile common bits 1 to 3 of parameter
variable No. 8504 (MV0 to MVA)
L86 P-CODE data For common variables, P-
• Volatile common CODE macros are
variable selected by bits 0 to 7 of
• Nonvolatile common parameter No. 8503 and
variable bits 1 to 3 of parameter
• P-CODE variable No. 8504 (MV0 to MVA)
• Extended P-CODE
variable

Inputting the values of variables

Macro variables stored in CNC memory are input to the

external input/output device.

• Mode setting
Set the MDI mode.

• Input procedure
Method 1 (when specifying neither file name nor file number
of an input file)
(1) Press soft key [READ].
(2) Press soft key [ALL VARIA.].

Method 2 (when specifying the file name of an input file )

(1) Press soft key [READ].
(2) Press soft key ["FILE NAME].
(3) Type a file name.
(4) Press soft key [FLE NAME"].
(5) Press soft key [ALL VARIA.].

Method 3 (when specifying the file number of an input file

(1))
(1) Press soft key [READ].
(2) Press soft key [(FILE#)].
(3) Type a file number.
(4) Press soft key [ALL VARIA.].

- 230 -
B-63323EN-2/01 8.OPERATION

Method 4 (when specifying the file number of an input file

(2))
(1) Press soft key [READ].
(2) Press address key .
(3) Type a file number.
(4) Press soft key [ALL VARIA.].

Method 5 (when specifying the file number of an input file

(3))
(1) Press address key .
(2) Type a file number.
(3) Press soft key [READ].

The input values of macro variables are automatically stored

in CNC memory.

NOTES
1 When variables are output to FANUC Floppy
Cassette, FANUC FA Card, FANUC Handy File, or
the memory card by using output method 1 (when
specifying neither output file name nor file number),
file name PCODE.TXT is set.
2 When FANUC Floppy Cassette, FANUC FA Card,
or FANUC Handy File is used for input/output of
variables, an input/output file can be specified with
a file name or file number.
3 When the memory card is used for input/output, an
input/output file can be specified with a file name.

Input/output with another

screen
Macro variable input/output operation is enabled with the
floppy list screen and memory card screen as well as the P-
CODE macro variable screen.
* For operation methods and other detail information, refer
to "FANUC Series 15i/150i-MA Operator's Manual
(Operation)" (B-63324EN-1).

NOTE
When display of the P-CODE macro variable screen
is suppressed (bit 4 (VAR) of parameter No. 8502 is
0), input/output is disabled on the floppy list screen
and memory card screen.

- 231 -
8.OPERATION B-63323EN-2/01

8.2 Displaying P-CODE Macro Program Numbers

On the P-CODE macro program number list screen, the

program numbers of P-CODE macros registered in FROM
are displayed.

Displaying a list of P-CODE macro program numbers

The P-CODE macro program number list screen is displayed

by following one of the methods explained below.

Method 1
(1) Press function key several times until the
PROGRAM DIRECTORY screen is displayed.

PAGE
(2) Use page keys PAGE
or cursor keys

to change pages until the P-CODE

macro program number list screen is displayed.

Method 2
(1) Press function key .

(2) Press soft key [DIR.MEMORY].

PAGE
(3) Use page keys PAGE
or cursor keys

to change pages until the P-CODE

macro program number list screen is displayed.

NOTE
This screen is displayed according to the setting of
bit 0 (DIR) of parameter No. 8502.

- 232 -
B-63323EN-2/01 8.OPERATION

P-CODE macro program number list screen

The program numbers of P-CODE macros registered in

FROM are listed.

- 233 -
8.OPERATION B-63323EN-2/01

8.3 Displaying Execution Macro Call Information

On the last block screen and active block screen of the

program check screen, execution macro call information is
also included in the call stack information.

Displaying the last block and active block screens

The last block or active block screen is displayed by using one

of the following methods:

Method 1
(1) Press function key several times until the last
block or active block screen is displayed.

Method 2
(1) Press function key .
(2) Press soft key [LAST] or [ACTIVE].

* For details, refer to "FANUC Series 15i/150i-MA Operator's

Manual (Operation)" (B-63324EN-1).

- 234 -
B-63323EN-2/01 8.OPERATION

Execution macro call

information
Execution macro call information is displayed.

When the call stack information exceeds 12 lines, pages can

PAGE
be changed using page keys PAGE
or cursor keys
.

- 235 -
8.OPERATION B-63323EN-2/01

Comments on execution macro types are displayed as follows:

Comment Call
PCDSUB Subprogram call
PCDMCR Macro call
PCDG66 Modal call
PCDG66.1 Modal call

NOTE
Program names cannot be used.

- 236 -
B-63323EN-2/01 9.PARAMETERS

9 PARAMETERS

- 237 -
9.PARAMETERS B-63323EN-2/01

9.1 Compile Parameters

Compile parameters are initialized to values set in P-CODE

at power-up. Therefore, these parameters cannot be
changed by MDI. Exceptionally, parameter Nos. 8547 and
8548, which are used for debugging, can be set by MDI.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8500 LD6 R10 R05

[Data type] Bit

# 3 R05
# 5 R10 P-CODE file size

R10 R05 P-CODE file size

0 0 256K byte
0 1 512K byte
1 0 1M byte
1 1 Undefined

#7 LD6
1: Always set this bit to 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8502 NPE TMC EUI VAR DBG SBK DIR

[Data type] Bit

#0 DIR On the PROGRAM DIRECTORY screen, the program

numbers of P-CODE macros are:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.

NOTE
For P-CODE macros, program names cannot be
displayed.

#2 SBK When a conversational macro (talk macro)/auxiliary

macro is executed using the debugging function:
0: Continuous execution is performed.
1: Single-block execution is performed.

#3 DBG The debugging function is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.

- 238 -
B-63323EN-2/01 9.PARAMETERS

#4 VAR The P-CODE macro variable screen can:

0: Not be displayed.
1: Be displayed.

#5 EUI As the UI/UO signals, P-CODE macros use:

0: UI00 to UI15 and UO00 to UO15.
1: EUI00 to EUI15 and EUO00 to EUO15.

#6 TMC Execution macro call by a T code performs:

0: Subprogram call for O9000.
1: Macro call for O9008.

#7 NPE In reader/puncher interface control, automatic output

of % (EOF) is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8503 MV7 MV6 MV5 MV4 MV3 MV2 MV1 MV0

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8504 MVA MV9 MV8 ECK

[Data type] Bit

Common variables (#100 to #999) used by P-CODE macros are:

0: Used also as custom macro common variables.
1: P-CODE macro common variables independent of
custom macro common variables.

The range of common variables is selected by bit setting.

8503 # 0 MV0 #100 to 149
# 1 MV1 #150 to 199
# 2 MV2 #500 to 549
# 3 MV3 #550 to 599
# 4 MV4 #600 to 699
# 5 MV5 #700 to 799
# 6 MV6 #800 to 899
# 7 MV7 #900 to 999
8504 # 1 MV8 #200 to 299
# 2 MV9 #300 to 399
# 3 MVA #400 to 499

#0 ECK With the command input variable (#8501), command

keys that can be read are:
0: Not extended.
1: Extended.
The following command keys can be extended and read:

- 239 -
9.PARAMETERS B-63323EN-2/01

Function menu key 22 Function key 23 Function key 24

Function key 25 Function key 26 Function key 27

Function key 28 Function key 29 Function key 30

NOTE
When command keys are extended, pressing
these command keys does not terminate the
conversational macro (talk macro) function, so a
corresponding screen does not appear. In this
case, 0 must be set in the conversational macro
(talk macro) start control variable (#8510) to
terminate the conversational macro (talk macro)
function.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8507 PWS NTV CAN

[Data type] Bit

#1 CAN When the data sending/reception wait state is entered in

reader/puncher interface control, the CAN key is:
0: Not used for cancellation.
1: Used for cancellation.

#2 NTV When LF is output by G336 (data sending), a blank for

TV checking is:
0: Output.
1: Not output.

#5 PWS P-CODE work number search is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8508 PCR CLG BSC SSC TEC AC2 AC1

- 240 -
B-63323EN-2/01 9.PARAMETERS

[Data type] Bit

#0 AC1 Subprogram call by a particular code (O9004) is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#1 AC2 Subprogram call by a particular code (O9005) is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#2 TEC Macro call or subprogram call by a T code is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#3 SSC Subprogram call by an S code is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#5 BSC Subprogram call by a second auxiliary function code is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#6 CLG Accumulation/presetting of cutting distance (#8554) is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#7 PCR CNC program reference/write, accumulation/presetting

of cutting distance, and reader/punch interface control
are:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8509 GMP PTC MCT EV2 EV1

[Data type] Bit

#0 EV1 Extended P-CODE variables (#40000 and up) are:

0: Floating-point data.
1: Integer data.

#1 EV2 P-CODE variables (#30000 and up) are:

0: Floating-point data.
1: Integer data.

#2 MCT Modal call of macro call by a G code is:

0: Move command call (equivalent to G66).
1: Call per block (equivalent to G66.1).

- 241 -
9.PARAMETERS B-63323EN-2/01

#3 PTC G338 (macro variable output) outputs EOB as:

0: LF.
1: LF CR CR.

#7 GMP A call by an M, S, T, secondary auxiliary function, or

particular code, or by an axis address during call by a G
code, and a call by a G code during call by an M, S, T,
secondary auxiliary function, or particular code, or by an
axis address are:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled. (Operation takes place as if an ordinary
NC command were specified.)

8510 M code for subprogram call with program No. 9001

8511 M code for subprogram call with program No. 9002

8512 M code for subprogram call with program No. 9003

[Data type] Integer

[Valid data range] 1 to 9999 (excluding 30, 98, and 99)

These parameters set M codes for performing a
subprogram call with program No. 9001 to 9003.

8513 G code for macro call with program No. 9010

8514 G code for macro call with program No. 9011

8515 G code for macro call with program No. 9012

8516 G code for macro call with program No. 9013

8517 G code for macro call with program No. 9014

8518 G code for macro call with program No. 9015

8519 G code for macro call with program No. 9016

8520 G code for macro call with program No. 9017

8521 G code for macro call with program No. 9018

8522 G code for macro call with program No. 9019

- 242 -
B-63323EN-2/01 9.PARAMETERS

[Data type] Integer

[Valid data range] -999 to 999 (excluding 0, 65, 66, and 67)
These parameters set G codes for performing a macro
call with program No. 9010 to 9019.

8523 M code for macro call with program No. 9020

8524 M code for macro call with program No. 9021

8525 M code for macro call with program No. 9022

8526 M code for macro call with program No. 9023

8527 M code for macro call with program No. 9024

8528 M code for macro call with program No. 9025

8529 M code for macro call with program No. 9026

8530 M code for macro call with program No. 9027

8531 M code for macro call with program No. 9028

8532 M code for macro call with program No. 9029

[Data type] Integer

[Valid data range] 1 to 9999 (excluding 30, 98, and 99)
These parameters set M codes for performing a macro
call with program No. 9020 to 9029.

8533 M code for calling a user program as a subprogram

[Data type] Integer

[Valid data range] 1 to 9999 (excluding 30, 98, and 99)
This parameter sets an M code for calling a user program
as a subprogram.

8536 Main program No. of a conversational macro (talk macro)

[Data type] Integer

[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999
This parameter sets the main program number of a
conversational macro (talk macro).

- 243 -
9.PARAMETERS B-63323EN-2/01

NOTE
The program number set in this parameter is set in
the conversational macro (talk macro) execution
control variable at power-up.

8537 Main program No. of an auxiliary macro

[Data type] Integer

[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999
This parameter sets the main program number of an
auxiliary macro.

NOTE
The program number set in this parameter is set in
the auxiliary macro execution control variable at
power-up.

8538 Call code of subprogram call by range specification M code (lower limit)

8539 Call code of subprogram call by range specification M code (upper limit)

[Data type] Integer

[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
These parameters specify the range of a call code that
can be used for performing a subprogram call by range
specification M code.

NOTES
1 If a value beyond the range is set, or if the value set
in parameter No. 8538 is greater than the value set
in parameter No. 8539, a subprogram call by range
specification M code is disabled.
2 M30, M98, M99, and the M codes used for macro
and subprogram calls are not used as a call code
even if these codes are within the set range.

- 244 -
B-63323EN-2/01 9.PARAMETERS

8540 Time until the sending/reception wait state results in time-out

[Data type] Integer

[Unit of data] s
[Valid data range] 0 to 180
This parameter sets the time from when the
sending/reception function (G335 to G338) in
reader/punch interface control enters the
sending/reception wait state until a time-out occurs.
When 0 is set, no time-out occurs.

8544 Call address of subprogram call by a particular code (O9004)

8545 Call address of subprogram call by a particular code (O9005)

[Data type] Integer

[Valid data range] 65(A) to 90(Z) (excluding O, N, P, L, G, and axis names)
These parameters set the call address of a subprogram
call by a particular code.

8546 Number of definitions of macro calls by G codes (multiple specifications)

8551 First G code of macro calls by G codes (multiple specifications)

8552 First program No. of macro calls by G codes (multiple specifications)

[Data type] Integer

[Valid data range] No. 8546: 1 to 255
No. 8551: -9999 to 9999 (excluding 0)
No. 8552: 1 to 99999999

Parameter No. 8546 sets the number of programs when

more than one macro call is specified with G codes.
Parameter No. 8551 sets the first number of the call
codes. Parameter No. 8552 sets the first program No. of
execution macros.
When a negative value is set in parameter No. 8551, a
modal call is performed. For specification equivalent to
move command call (G66)/call per block (G66.1), set bit 2
(MCT) of parameter No. 8509.

- 245 -
9.PARAMETERS B-63323EN-2/01

NOTE
• Macro calls by G codes (multiple specifications) are
disabled when:
<1> A value beyond the range exists in one of
these parameters.
<2> The G code range exceeds 9999.
<3> The program number range exceeds
99999999.
• G65, G66, G67, and the G code used for macro
call are not used as a call code even if they are
included in the set range.

Program number of a conversational macro (talk macro)/auxiliary

8547
macro that causes a break

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Integer
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets the program number of a
conversational macro (talk macro)/auxiliary macro that
causes the debugging function to break.

NOTE
When the conversational macro (talk macro)
function is executed, a break is enabled if a non-
zero value is set in this parameter or parameter No.
8548. The program number set in this parameter
and the sequence number set in parameter No.
8548 are set as the break conditions.

Sequence number of a conversational macro (talk macro)/auxiliary

8548
macro that causes a break

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Integer
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets the sequence number of a
conversational macro (talk macro)/auxiliary macro that
causes the debugging function to break.

- 246 -
B-63323EN-2/01 9.PARAMETERS

NOTE
When the conversational macro (talk macro)
function is executed, a break is enabled if a non-
zero value is set in this parameter or parameter No.
8547. The sequence number set in this
parameter and the program number set in
parameter No. 8547 are set as the break
conditions.

8549 Number of P-CODE variables (#30000 and up)

[Data type] Integer

[Valid data range] 0 to 100
This parameter sets the number of P-CODE variables.

The number of variables actually defined depends on the

setting of bit 1 (EV2) of parameter No. 8509 as follows:
EV2 = 0 (floating-point data):
Value in parameter No. 8549 × 40
EV2 = 1 (integer data):
Value in parameter No. 8549 × 100

8550 Number of extended P-CODE variables (#40000 and up)

[Data type] Integer

[Valid data range] 0 to 1970
This parameter sets the number of extended P-CODE
variables.

The number of variables actually defined depends on the

setting of bit 0 (EV1) of parameter No. 8509 as follows:
EV1 = 0 (floating-point data):
Value in parameter No. 8550 × 10
EV1 = 1 (integer data):
Value in parameter No. 8550 × 30

- 247 -
9.PARAMETERS B-63323EN-2/01

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8555 X08 X07 X06 X05 X04 X03 X02 X01

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8556 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X10 X09 X08

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8557 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20 X19 X18 X17

[Data type] Bit

Macro call by an axis address is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

Select an axis by setting a corresponding bit.

8555 # 0 X01 1st axis
# 1 X02 2nd axis
:
8558 # 7 X24 24th axis

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8558 ACA P98 15I PWT XDL ACS

[Data type] Bit

#0 ACS In macro call by an axis address:

0: The execution macro to be called is always O9009.
1: The execution macro to be called varies depending on
the axis.

1st axis → Calls O9031.

2nd axis → Calls O9032.
:
n-th axis → Calls O9030 + n.

#1 XDL Interlock in an axis direction is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

- 248 -
B-63323EN-2/01 9.PARAMETERS

#2 PWT At power-up, the conversational macro (talk macro)

function is:
0: Not executed.
1: Executed.
Although the position display screen is normally
displayed at power-up, the conversational macro (talk
macro) function can also be executed to display a special
screen.

#3 15I The macro executor function follows:

0: Series 15-B compatible specifications.
1: Original specifications for the Series 15i.

This bit selects the following specifications:

Series 15-B Series 15i specifications

Function
specifications (15I = 0) (15I = 1)
Character coordinate system X0 to 73, Y0 to 26 X0 to 79,.Y0 to 26
System display part FS15-B FS15i
Soft key frame
Key input line Y22 Y23
Command key input variable The INSERT, ALTER, and Can be read.
by #8501 DELETE keys cannot be INSERT : 31
read. ALTER : 32
DELETE : 33
Method of executing both Sequential execution. Parallel execution
auxiliary macro and (After the auxiliary macro
conversational macro (talk program end command is
macro) executed, the
conversational macro (talk
macro) is executed.)
Alarm information by window When a foreground PS When a foreground PS
function alarm or MC alarm is alarm is issued. MC
(Foreground PS alarms of issued alarms can be read with
alarm basic flags) basic flag 2.

#4 P98 The execution macro for P-CODE work number search is

called by:
0: Macro call.
Local variables used by the execution macro cannot
be used by the main program.
1: Subprogram call.
Local variables used by the execution macro are
passed to the main program.

#5 ACA In macro call by a T code/macro call by an axis address,

arguments without the decimal point are:
0: Always passed as integer values.
1: Passed with the decimal point added according to
the setting of bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 2400.

- 249 -
9.PARAMETERS B-63323EN-2/01

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8559 AP1

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 AP1 When a CNC parameter is referenced with address

function P,
0: The Series 15B-compatible specifications are
followed.
1: The Series 15i specifications are followed.

NOTE
When the Series 15B-compatible specifications are
selected, a parameter value of the Series 15B can
be reference by entering the parameter number.
Note that only parameters of which input
specifications are completely compatible with those
of the Series 15i can be referenced. If an attempt
is made to reference another type of parameter, a
empty(#0) is read as the value. If an execution
macro references that type of parameter, alarm
PS302 is issued.

When the Series 15i specifications are selected, all

parameters can be referenced. The parameters
can be referenced in the same units as the values
displayed on the parameter screen. However, if
parameters No. 2210 and No. 2211, which are
used for Program Encryption, are referenced, zero
is read.

8570 Shift amount of graphic coordinate system (X-axis)

8571 Shift amount of graphic coordinate system (Y-axis)

[Data type] Integer

[Unit of data] dot
[Valid data range] These parameters set the shift amounts of the graphic
coordinate system.

- 250 -
B-63323EN-2/01 9.PARAMETERS

8572 Address of axis interlock mode signal

8573 Bit position of axis interlock mode signal

[Data type] Integer

[Valid data range] 0 to 7
These parameters specify the PMC internal relay (R
area) signal that determines the control mode of the axis
interlock function.

Address : Specify an R area number.

Bit position: Specify the bit position of the signal.

NOTE
The axis interlock function is disabled when:
<1> The address is beyond the R area.
<2> The bit position is not correct.

8574 P-CODE common variable (#500 to #999) protection range (top)

8575 P-CODE common variable (#500 to #999) protection range (end)

[Data type] Integer

[Valid data range] 500 to 999
These parameters set the range of write-protected
nonvolatile P-CODE common variables (#500 to #999).

NOTE
If a value beyond the range is set, or if the value set
in parameter No. 8574 is greater than the value in
parameter No. 8575, write protection is not
provided.

8576 P-CODE common variable (#200 to #499) protection range (top)

8577 P-CODE common variable (#200 to #499) protection range (end)

[Data type] Integer

[Valid data range] 200 to 499
These parameters set the range of write-protected
nonvolatile P-CODE common variables (#200 to #499).

- 251 -
9.PARAMETERS B-63323EN-2/01

NOTE
If a value beyond the range is set, or if the value set
in parameter No. 8576 is greater than the value in
parameter No. 8577, write protection is not
provided.

- 252 -
B-63323EN-2/01 9.PARAMETERS

9.2 P-CODE Macro Parameters

At power-up, these parameters are not initialized to values

set in P-CODE. Therefore, these parameters can be
changed by MDI.

7045 Operation speed for the auxiliary macro function

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Integer
[Valid data range] 0 to 20
The auxiliary macro function executes several blocks of
an auxiliary macro at a time at intervals of certain
period of time. This parameter sets the number of
blocks to be executed at a time. Blocks as many as (the
set value + 1) are executed. For example, when 5 is set
in this parameter, six blocks are executed at a time.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8000 NLP

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit

#3 NLP Parameters for the macro executor are:

0: Loaded from P-CODE.
1: Not loaded from P-CODE.
At power-up, parameters for the macro executor are
normally initialized to values set in P-CODE. When
this parameter is set to 1, the parameters except
parameter Nos. 8500, 8501, 8549, and 8550 are not
initialized.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8600 08M 07M 06M 05M 04M 03M 02M 01M

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8601 16M 15M 14M 13M 12M 10M 09M 08M

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8602 24M 23M 22M 21M 20M 19M 18M 17M

- 253 -
9.PARAMETERS B-63323EN-2/01

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

Macro call by an axis address is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.

Select an axis by setting a corresponding bit.

8600 # 0 01M 1st axis
#1 02M 2nd axis
:
8602 # 7 24M 24th axis

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8603 TCM

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 TCM Macro call/subprogram call by a T code is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.

- 254 -
B-63323EN-2/01 10.APPENDIX

10 APPENDIX

- 255 -
10.APPENDIX B-63323EN-2/01

10.1 Error No. List

The error No. list given below explains the meanings of the
error Nos. displayed as follows:
• Error Nos. displayed on the debugger screen of the
debugging function
• Error Nos. displayed on the TALK MACRO screen when a
fatal error (an error that prevents continuation of
execution) occurs during execution of a conversational
macro (talk macro) or auxiliary macro, stopping the
execution of the macro
Error Nos. are classified as follows:
(1) 1 to 9999 : Numbers that match the PS/SR
alarm numbers
(2) 10001 and up: Fatal error numbers
(3) 10101 and up: Numbers displayed only on the
debugger screen
(4) 99999999 : Error No. when a conversational
macro (talk macro) terminates
forcibly.
The error Nos. from 1 to 9999 indicate errors in commands
that can be used also in the execution macro. For the
execution macro, a PS/SR alarm is issued when an error
occurs, and automatic operation must be stopped.
Therefore, the error Nos. from 1 to 9999 match the error Nos.
of PS/SR alarms. If an error No. from 1 to 9999 that is not
indicated in the table shown below is displayed, refer to
APPENDIX A, "ALARM LIST" in "FANUC Series 15i/150i-
MA Operator's Manual (Programming)" (B-63324EN).

Error Nos. (1 to 9999)

Error Nos. that match error Nos. of PS/SR alarms

Error No. Description

00003 The allowable number of digits is exceeded.
00006 Illegal use of a negative sign
00007 Illegal use of a decimal point
00010 Incorrect G-code
00011 Incorrect address
00110 Overflow of an integer value
00111 Overflow of a fraction
00112 Division by zero
00114 A variable number is beyond the allowable range.
00115 Read-protected variable
00116 Write-protected variable
00119 An argument is beyond the allowable range.
00135 Illegal macro statement format
00143 Illegal print statement format
00217 Format error

- 256 -
B-63323EN-2/01 10.APPENDIX

00305 Data is beyond the allowable range.

00333 Data write error
00580 Security alarm (password)
00590 TH error
00591 TV error
00805 I/O interface illegal command
00806 I/O interface operation error
00807 I/O interface parameter error
00808 Device opened twice
00820 DR signal off (1)
00822 Overrun error (1)
00823 Framing error (1)
00824 Buffer overflow (1)
00830 DR signal off (2)
00832 Overrun error (2)
00833 Framing error (2)
00834 Buffer overflow (2)
00840 DR signal off (3)
00842 Overrun error (3)
00843 Framing error (3)
00844 Buffer overflow (3)
00850 DR signal off (4)
00852 Overrun error (4)
00853 Framing error (4)
00854 Buffer overflow (4)
00855 DR signal off (remote buffer)
00856 Buffer overflow (remote buffer)
00860 DR signal off (modem card)
00862 Overrun error (modem card)
00863 Framing error (modem card)
00864 Buffer overflow (modem card)
00910 Device driver error (undefined)
00946 Communication error (remote buffer)

Error Nos. (10001 and up)

Fatal errors that prevent execution of a conversational macro
(talk macro)/auxiliary macro

Error No. Description

10001 Program not found
10002 Sequence number not found
10003 Illegal P-CODE
10004 Too many multiplexed macros
10005 Too many multiplexed subprograms
10006 Program end
10007 Address P error
10008 Sequence number error
10009 Program number error

- 257 -
10.APPENDIX B-63323EN-2/01

Error Nos. (10101 and up)

Errors displayed only by the debugger

Error No. Description

10101 Too many arguments
10102 Too long string
10103 Illegal PMC address
10104 PMC address error
10105 PMC bit error
10106 No graphic option
10107 No string
10108 Specification by execution macro is impossible.
11001 File not found
11002 File not opened
11003 Too many open files
11004 Too many files
11005 Too large file size
11006 Pointer error
11007 File size error
11008 File open error
11009 File not closed
11010 Illegal access mode
11011 Duplicate file
11012 I/O error
11013 Illegal file number
11014 Illegal data type
11015 Write-protected data
11016 Controlled-axis error
11017 Decimal point error
11018 Empty data input error
11019 Specification by conversational macro (talk macro) is
impossible.
11020 Specification by auxiliary macro is impossible.
11021 Specification by execution macro/auxiliary macro is
impossible.
11022 Specification by auxiliary macro/conversational macro (talk
macro) is impossible.
11023 Illegal block delete number
11024 File I/O error
11026 No PMC-axis control option
11027 Address A out of range
11028 Address B out of range
11029 Address C out of range
11030 Address D out of range
11031 Address E out of range
11032 Address F out of range
11033 Address G out of range
11034 Address H out of range
11035 Address I out of range
11036 Address J out of range
11037 Address K out of range
11038 Address L out of range

- 258 -
B-63323EN-2/01 10.APPENDIX

11039 Address M out of range

11040 Address N out of range
11041 Address O out of range
11042 Address P out of range
11043 Address Q out of range
11044 Address R out of range
11045 Address S out of range
11046 Address T out of range
11047 Address U out of range
11048 Address V out of range
11049 Address W out of range
11050 Address X out of range
11051 Address Y out of range
11052 Address Z out of range
11053 No address A command
11054 No address B command
11055 No address C command
11056 No address D command
11057 No address E command
11058 No address F command
11059 No address G command
11060 No address H command
11061 No address I command
11062 No address J command
11063 No address K command
11064 No address L command
11065 No address M command
11066 No address N command
11067 No address O command
11068 No address P command
11069 No address Q command
11070 No address R command
11071 No address S command
11072 No address T command
11073 No address U command
11074 No address V command
11075 No address W command
11076 No address X command
11077 No address Y command
11078 No address Z command
11079 Duplicate address command
11080 System error (graphic)
11081 System error (character)
11082 Travel distance is 0 in PMC axis control.
11083 Read error in PMC axis control
11084 Illegal axis number in PMC axis control
11085 Bit 6 (NAD) of parameter No. 1810 is 1.
11086 Not dwell time
11087 Too many servo axes
11088 Too many controlled axes
11089 Bit 7 (PCR) of parameter No. 8508 is 0.
11090 Illegal data in #8502

- 259 -
10.APPENDIX B-63323EN-2/01

11091 Bit 7 (CNT) of parameter No. 1804 is 0.

11092 Illegal A/D converter channel number
11093 Read failure in window function
11101 Duplicate open operation
11102 Being used by another user
11103 Program not found
11104 Program being edited
11110 Program not found
11111 Duplicate program number
11112 No free area
11113 Too many items registered
11115 Editing impossible (word)
11116 Editing impossible (program)
11200 Background editing in progress
11201 Data protection key off
11202 Illegal program number specified
11203 Illegal block number specified
11204 Illegal address format
11205 Illegal macro variable number
11353 Word type error
11355 Bit 7 (PCR) of parameter No. 8508 is 0.
11401 Illegal command
11402 Command execution impossible
11403 No line function option
11410 DR signal off
11411 CD signal off
11412 Overrun error
11413 Framing error
11414 Buffer excess error
11415 Line not opened
11416 Parity error
11417 RTX overflow
11418 VRDD error
11420 Parameter error
11421 Data type error
11422 File number error
11423 File not found
11430 Line being used
11499 Continuous read possible
11515 Variable number undefined
11600 Sending/reception wait in progress (after specified
time/canceled)
11655 No reception data

Error No. (99999999)

Error when a conversational macro (talk macro) is
terminated forcibly

Error No. Description

99999999 The conversational macro (talk macro) function is
terminated forcibly.

- 260 -
B-63323EN-2/01 10.APPENDIX

10.2 Macro Program Example (Inputting Data and Performing

Circle Cutting)

Fig. 10.2 (a) Screen Layout of Circle Cutting

Move the cursor by using cursor key or or soft

key [RADIUS], [FEED], or [OFS NO]. At the cursor
position, type data by MDI, then write it by using INPUT.
Alternatively, after typing data, press an appropriate soft
key to directly input the data. After inputting all data,
press soft key [EXEC] to check whether the system is in
memory mode. Then, you are prompted for cycle start.
Perform cycle start.

10.2.1 Program functions

Automatic operation program stored in program memory

Program No. Function

O1000 Program for starting circle cutting execution macro
O9010
Note) Set parameter No. 8513 to 100, and select
O1000 in memory mode in advance.

- 261 -
10.APPENDIX B-63323EN-2/01

P-CODE macros
Program No. Function
O0001 Main program menu display
O0010 Key input test
O0011 Soft key display
O0020 Cursor test
O0030 Display test
O0031 Blink test
O0032 Character string data
O0040 Address value test
O0050 Circle cutting main program
O0051 Cursor and data display
O0052 Display of character strings for circle cutting
O0053 Circle cutting graphic display
O9010 Macro program for executing circle cutting

10.2.2 Meanings of macro variables

Variable No. Meaning

#100 to #103 Work areas used for, for example, storing variables
temporarily
#142 Key input value (#8501)
#143 Character string data offset
#144 Numeric data input value (#8503)
#145 Address data input value (#8504)
#146 X coordinate of the cursor
#147 Y coordinate of the cursor

10.2.3 Source programs

Program for starting circle cutting execution macro O9010

00010 O1000 ;
00020 G100 ;
00030 M02 ;

- 262 -
B-63323EN-2/01 10.APPENDIX

Main program

00010 O0001 ;
00020 G390 ;
00030 G202 P3 ;
00040 G230 L0 ;
00050 #8502 = 0 ;
00060 G243 X0 Y0 A1 B0 (SAMPLE PROGRAM) ;
00070 X2 Y3 (1 -- KEY TEST) ;
00080 X2 Y5 (2 -- COUSOR TEST) ;
00090 X2 Y7 (3 -- DISPLAY TEST) ;
00100 X2 Y9 (4 -- ADDRESS VARIABLE) ;
00110 X2 Y11(5 -- CIRCLE) ;
00120 #8509 = 0033 ;
00130 #143 = 300 ;
00140 M98 P0011;
00150 N001 #142 = #8501 ;
00160 IF [ #142 EQ 0 ]GOTO 99 ;
00170 IF [ #142 LT 12 ]GOTO 99 ;
00180 IF [ #142 GT 16 ]GOTO 99 ;
00190 #8500 =[ #142 - 11 ]* 10 ;
00200 M99 ;
00210 N099 M99 P1 ;

Key input source program

00010 O0010 ;
00020 N10 G202 P3 ;
00030 N20 G243 X0 Y2 A1 B0 (KEY TEST -- HIT ANY
KEY --) ;
00040 N30 #143 = 100 ;
00050 M98 P0011 ;
00060 N100 #8502 = 2 ;
00070 N110 #142 = #8501 ;
00080 IF [ #142EQ0 ]GOTO 200 ;
00090 #101 = #142 ;
00100 #102 = #8503 ;
00110 #103 = #8504 ;
00120 G243 X0 Y4 A1 B0 (CONTROL ) F8.3 Z0 D#101 ;
00130 G243 X0 Y5 A1 B0 (ADDRESS ) F8.3 Z0 D#103 ;
00140 G243 X0 Y6 A1 B0 (DATA ) F8.3 Z0 D#102 ;
00150 N200 IF [ #142 NE 16 ]GOTO 220 ;
00160 N210 #8500 = 1 ;
00170 M99 ;
00180 N220 IF [ #142 EQ 0 ]GOTO 300 ;
00190 M99 P100 ;
00200 N300 M99 P110 ;

- 263 -
10.APPENDIX B-63323EN-2/01

00010 O0011 ;
00020 #100 = 0 ;
00030 WHILE [ #100 LT 5 ] DO 1 ;
00040 #1 = #143 + #100 ;
00050 G243 X[ #100 * 7 + 2 ]Y25 A1 B0 P [ #1 ];
00060 #100 = #100 + 1 ;
00070 END 1 ;
00080 M99 ;

Cursor control source program

00010 O0020 ;
00020 G202 P3 ;
00030 G230 L0 ;
00040 #8502 = 0 ;
00050 N008 G243 X0 Y1 (CURSOR TEST -- MOVE
CURSOR --) ;
00060 G243 X0 Y3 (A) ;
00070 G243 X0 Y4 (B) ;
00080 G243 X0 Y5 (C) ;
00090 G243 X0 Y6 (D) ;
00100 G243 X0 Y7 (E) ;
00110 G243 X0 Y8 (F) ;
00120 #143 = 100 ;
00130 M98 P0011 ;
00140 #100 = 0 ;
00150 #146 = 2 ;
00160 N001 #142 = #8501 ;
00170 IF [ #142 EQ 0 ] GOTO 20 ;
00180 IF [ #142 NE 4 ] GOTO 10 ;
00190 #100 = #100 + 1 ;
00200 N10 IF [ #142 NE 3 ]GOTO 20 ;
00210 #100 = #100 - 1 ;
00220 N20 #100 = #100 + 6 ;
00230 #100 = #100 - [ FIX[ #100 / 6 ]]* 6 ;
00240 #147 = #100 + 3 ;
00250 G230 X#146 Y#147 L1 ;
00260 IF [ #142 NE 16 ]GOTO 100 ;
00270 #8500 = 1 ;
00280 M99 ;
00290 N100 M99 P1 ;

- 264 -
B-63323EN-2/01 10.APPENDIX

Character string display source program

00010 O0030 ;
00020 #8509 = 33 ;
00030 G202 P3 ;
00040 #8502 = 0 ;
00050 G230 L0 ;
00060 #143 = 100 ;
00070 M98 P0011 ;
00080 N1 #100 = 1234.567 ;
00090 X0 Y0 A1 (DISPLAY TEST) ;
00100 X0 Y1 (FANUC SERIES 15I MACRO COMPILER) ;
00110 X0 Y5 (--2 BYTE CHARACTER DISPLAY TEST--) ;
00120 X3 Y7 (*352D 3966 2F40 2F48 2F79 2F53*) ;
00130 M98 P0032 ;
00140 X0 Y13 (--DATA DISPLAY TEST 1234.567--) ;
00150 X3 Y15 (LEADING ZERO SUPPRESS) ;
00160 X6 Y16 Z1 F8.3 (F8.3 ) D#100 ;
00170 X6 Y17 Z1 F5.2 (F5.2 ) D#100 ;
00180 X3 Y18 (NOT LEADING ZERO SUPPRESS) ;
00190 X6 Y19 Z0 F8.3 (F8.3 ) D#100 ;
00200 X6 Y20 Z0 F5.2 (F5.2 ) D#100 ;
00210 X39 Y5 (--STRINGS DISPLAY TEST--) ;
00220 X41 Y7 P10 ;
00230 X41 Y8 P20 ;
00240 X41 Y9 P30 ;
00250 X39 Y11 (--TRIPLE CHARACTER--) ;
00260 X41 Y13 A3 B0 (TRIPLE) ;
00270 #142 = #8501 ;
00280 IF [ #142 NE 16 ]GOTO 100 ;
00290 #8500 = 1 ;
00300 M99 ;
00310 N100 M99 P1 ;

00010 O0032 ;
00020 G243 X0 Y9 A1 B0 (--BLINK TEST--) ;
00030 N001 G243 X3 Y11 A1 B1 (BLINK) ;
00040 G243 B0 ;
00050 M99 ;

- 265 -
10.APPENDIX B-63323EN-2/01

00010 O0033 ;
00020 N10 (ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ) ;
00030 N20 (0123456789) ;
00040 N30 (FANUC TECHNICAL TRAINING CENTER) ;
00050 N100 ( );
00060 N101 ( );
00070 N102 ( );
00080 N103 ( );
00090 N104 ( END ) ;
00100 N200 (RADIUS) ;
00110 N201 ( FEED ) ;
00120 N202 (OFS NO) ;
00130 N203 ( EXEC ) ;
00140 N204 ( END ) ;
00150 N300 (TEST-1) ;
00160 N301 (TEST-2) ;
00170 N302 (TEST-3) ;
00180 N303 (TEST-4) ;
00190 N304 (TEST-5) ;
00200 N500 (INPUT DEV NUM FOR FORGROUND) ;
00210 N504 (OUTPUT DEV NUM FOR FORGROUND) ;
00220 N508 (INPUT DEV NUM FOR BACKGROUND);
00230 N512 (OUTPUT DEV NUM FOR BACKGROUND);
00240 M99 ;

- 266 -
B-63323EN-2/01 10.APPENDIX

Address function source program

00010 O0040 ;
00020 #143 = 100 ;
00030 M98 P0011 ;
00040 N10 G243 X0 Y2 A1 B0 (ADDRESS VARIABLE TEST) ;
00050 #100 = 20 ;
00060 X0 Y4 (ADDRESS G READ TEST) ;
00070 N20 #101 = G00.4 ;
00080 IF [ #101 EQ 0 ]GOTO 30 ;
00090 X0 Y6 Z1 F1.0 (ESP STATUS -- ) D#101 ( PUSH
ESP ) ;
00100 #142 = #8501 ;
00110 IF [ #142 EQ 16 ]GOTO 100 ;
00120 M99 P20 ;
00130 N30 X0 Y6 Z1 F1.0 (ESP STATUS -- ) D#101
( RESET ESP) ;
00140 G243 X0 Y8 (PARAMETER READ) ;
00150 #102 = 0 ;
00160 #8509 = 0033 ;
00170 WHILE [ #102 LE 3 ]DO 1 ;
00180 #1 = #102 + 20 ;
00190 #103 = P#1 ;
00200 #2 = #102 + 10 ;
00210 #100 = #100 + 1 ;
00220 G243 X0 Y#2 (NUM ) Z1 F3.0 D#1 ;
00230 ( -- ) D#103 ;
00240 G243 ( ) P [ #102 * 4 + 500 ];
00250 #102 = #102 + 1 ;
00260 #3 = #3 + 1 ;
00270 END 1 ;
00280 #142 = #8501 ;
00290 IF [ #142 NE 16 ]GOTO 200 ;
00300 N100 #8500 = 1 ;
00310 N200 M99 ;

- 267 -
10.APPENDIX B-63323EN-2/01

Graphic display and circle cutting source program

00010 O0050 ;
00020 G202 P3 ;
00030 #146 = 13 ;
00040 #147 = 2 ;
00050 G230 X#146 Y#147 L6 ;
00060 #147 = 0 ;
00070 M98 P0052 ;
00080 M98 P0053 ;
00090 M98 P0051 ;
00100 N10 #8502 = 1 ;
00110 N20 #142 = #8501 ;
00120 #144 = #8503 ;
00130 IF [ #142 EQ 0 ]GOTO 110 ;
00140 IF [ #142 NE 12 ]GOTO 30 ;
00150 #147 = 0 ;
00160 GOTO 90 ;
00170 N30 IF [ #142 NE 13 ]GOTO 40 ;
00180 #147 = 1 ;
00190 GOTO 90 ;
00200 N40 IF [ #142 NE 14 ]GOTO 50 ;
00210 #147 = 2 ;
00220 GOTO 90 ;
00230 N50 IF [ #142 NE 3 ]GOTO 60 ;
00240 #147 = #147 - 1 ;
00250 GOTO 90 ;
00260 N60 IF [ #142 NE 4 ]GOTO 70 ;
00270 #147 = #147 + 1 ;
00280 GOTO 90 ;
00290 N70 IF [ #142 NE 15 ]GOTO 80 ;
00300 M98 P54 ;
00310 GOTO 100 ;
00320 N80 IF [ #142 NE 8 ]GOTO 100 ;
00330 N90 #147 = #147 + 3 ;
00340 #147 = #147 - FIX [ #147 / 3 ]* 3 ;
00350 IF [ #144 EQ #0 ]GOTO 100 ;
00360 # [ 500 + #147 ]= #144 ;
00370 #1 = #147 + 2 ;
00380 G243 X14 Y#1 Z1 F4.0 D# [ #147 + 500 ] ;
00390 N100 M98 P0051 ;
00400 N110 IF [ #142 NE 16 ]GOTO 200 ;
00410 #8500 = 1 ;
00420 M99 ;
00430 N200 IF [ #142 EQ 0 ]GOTO 210 ;
00440 M99 P10 ;
00450 N210 M99 P20 ;

- 268 -
B-63323EN-2/01 10.APPENDIX

00010 O0051 ;
00020 #1 = #147 + 2 ;
00030 N100 G230 Y#1 L6 ;
00040 #100 = 0 ;
00050 WHILE [ #100 LT 3 ]DO 1 ;
00060 G243 X14 Y[ #100 + 2 ]Z1 F4.0 D#[ 500 + #100 ];
00070 #100 = #100 + 1 ;
00080 END 1 ;
00090 M99 ;

00010 O0052 ;
00020 G243 X0 Y0 A1 B0 (CIRCULAR CUTTING) ;
00030 X1 Y2 (I) ;
00040 (*28*) ;
00050 (RADIUS) ;
00060 (*29 20 20 3D*) ;
00070 X1 Y3 (F) ;
00080 (*28*) ;
00090 (FEED) ;
00100 (*29 20 20 20 20 3D*) ;
00110 X1 Y4 (D) ;
00120 (*28*) ;
00130 (OFS NUM) ;
00140 (*29 20 3D*) ;
00150 #143 = 200 ;
00160 M98 P0011 ;
00170 M99 ;

- 269 -
10.APPENDIX B-63323EN-2/01

00010 O0053 ;
00020 G244 P0 ;
00030 G240 P2 ;
00040 G242 X80 Y20 ;
00050 G301 X125 Y65 ;
00060 G302 X170 Y20 I0 J-45 ;
00070 G302 X170 Y20 I-90 J0 ;
00080 G302 X125 Y-25 I-45 J0 ;
00090 G301 X80 Y20 ;
00100 G244 P2 ;
00110 G242 X80 Y20 ;
00120 G240 P7 ;
00130 G301 Y-100 ;
00140 G242 X-10 Y20 ;
00150 G301 Y-100 ;
00160 G244 P1 ;
00170 G242 X80 Y-95 ;
00180 G240 P6 ;
00190 G301 X-10 ;
00200 G240 P7 ;
00210 G243 X41 Y14 A1 B0 (I) ;
00220 M99 ;

- 270 -
B-63323EN-2/01 10.APPENDIX

00010 O0054 ;
00020 #1 = F03.5 ;
00030 IF [ #1 EQ 1 ]GOTO 10 ;
00040 G240 P7 ;
00050 G243 X0 Y16 K30 ;
00060 G243 X0 Y18 K30 ;
00070 G240 P-3 ;
00080 G243 X0 Y16 B1 ( WARNING ) ;
00090 G243 X0 Y18 B0 ( PLEASE CHANGE MEMORY
MODE ) ;
00100 GOTO 20 ;
00110 N10 IF [#4000 EQ 1000]GOTO 11 ;
00120 G240 P7 ;
00130 G243 X0 Y16 K30 ;
00140 G243 X0 Y18 K30 ;
00150 G240 P-3 ;
00160 G243 X0 Y16 B1 ( WARNING ) ;
00170 G243 X0 Y18 B0 ( PLEASE SELECT O1000 ) ;
00180 GOTO 20 ;
00190 N11 G240 P7 ;
00200 G243 X0 Y16 K30 ;
00210 G243 X0 Y18 K30 ;
00220 G240 P-5 ;
00230 G243 X0 Y18 B1 ( PUSH CYCLE START ) ;
00240 N20 G240 P7 ;
00250 G243 B0 ;
00260 M99 ;

00010 O9010 ;
00020 G40 G49 G80 ;
00030 #1 = #500 / 2 ;
00040 G91 G42 G01 X#1 Y#1 F#501 ;
00050 G02 G17 X#1 Y-#1 J-#1 ;
00060 I-#500 ;
00070 X-#1 Y-#1 I-#1 ;
00080 G40 G01 X-#1 Y#1 ;
00090 M99 ;

- 271 -
10.APPENDIX B-63323EN-2/01

10.2.4 Flowchart

O0001 (main program)

START

Clear screen

Display menu

Display soft keys

Read key input variable

NO
Key input?

YES

YES
Soft key 1? Key input test

NO

YES
Soft key 2? Cursor display test

NO

YES
Soft key 3? Character display test

NO

M99

- 272 -
B-63323EN-2/01 10.APPENDIX

O0010 (key input test) O0011 (soft key display)

START START

Clear screen Counter = 0

Display title
NO
Counter < 5?

Display soft keys YES

Display soft key

(count No.)

NO
Key input?

Increment counter by 1
YES
Display key input variable,
numeric data variable, and
address data variable

M99

M99

- 273 -
10.APPENDIX B-63323EN-2/01

O0020 (cursor test) O0030 (display test)

START START

Clear screen Clear screen

Cursor off Cursor off

Display title Display soft keys

Display soft keys Display title

Counter = 0
Display characters

Cursor X coordinate = 2
Blink display

NO Display data
Key input?

YES
Display character string
Is key input NO
below cursor?
Display 3-time characters
YES

Increment counter by 1
YES
Is end key pressed?

Is key input NO NO
above cursor?
#8500=1
YES

Decrement counter by 1
M99

Calculate cursor position

Display cursor

M99

- 274 -
B-63323EN-2/01 10.APPENDIX

O0032 (blink test)

START

Display title

Blink display

M99

O0040 (address variable test)

START

Clear screen

Display soft keys

Display title

Read PMC data

(G000#4 emergency stop)

NO
G000#4=0 ?

YES
Display "RESET ESP"

Display "PUSH ESP"

Display cursor

M99
M99

- 275 -
10.APPENDIX B-63323EN-2/01

O0050 (circle cutting)

START

NO
Clear screen Soft key 3?

YES
Cursor display X=13 Y=2
Cursor pointer = 2

Cursor display ON
NO
Above soft key?

Display character
string for data YES

Cursor pointer = -1

Graphic display

NO
Below soft key?
Display data
YES

Cursor pointer = +1
Read numeric data

NO
NO Soft key 4?
Key input?

YES
YES
Display execution
NO macro start message
Soft key 1?

YES
Display data
Cursor pointer = 0

M99
NO
Soft key 2?

YES

Cursor pointer = 1

- 276 -
B-63323EN-2/01 10.APPENDIX

10.2.5 Program explanation

Explanation of O0001
00030 G202 P3
Erases a screen. P1: Character screen
P2: Graphic screen
P3: Character and graphic screen

00040 G230 L0
Cursor control L0: Cursor OFF
L1: Cursor ON. The cursor length is 1.

00060 G243 X0 Y0 A1 B0 (SAMPLE PROGRAM)

00070 X2 Y3 ( • • • • )
Displays a character string on the screen.
G243 : Character display
X0 : X-axis display start position
Y0 : Y-axis display start position
A1 : Character size (A1: 100%, A3: 300%)
( • • • • ): The character string enclosed in parentheses
is displayed on the screen.

NOTE
In NC programming, the control-in/out function
allows parentheses to be used to indicate
comments. In conversational macros (talk
macros), parentheses indicate data to be
displayed, so comments cannot be used.

00120 #8509 = 0033

00130 #143 = 300
00140 M98 P0011
#8509 is a character string registration program control
variable which allows use of the G243XYP sequence number
to display a character string corresponding to the sequence
number. #8509 sets a program number including a
sequence number. #143 is a common variable. Here, it is
used as an offset of the sequence number. O0011 displays a
menu for a soft key.

00150 N001 #142=#8501

#8501 is a key input variable used to accept a key such as a
cursor key, page key, soft key, or input key. Once the
variable is read, it is cleared to zero. So, the data in the
variable is saved in #142.

- 277 -
10.APPENDIX B-63323EN-2/01

Explanation of O0011
00030 WHILE [conditional-expression] DO1
••••
••••
00070 END1
While the conditional expression holds, the WHILE
statement performs the processing between DO and END.
If the conditional expression does not hold, the block next to
the corresponding END statement and subsequent blocks are
executed.

00040 #1 = #143 + #100

00050 G243 X [#100[#100 * 7 +2]
+2] Y25 A1 B0 P[
P[#1]
#1]
#1 is a local variable that contains the sum of the value of
common variable #143 used as an offset of the sequence
number and the value of counter #100. #100 is used as a
counter for counting from 0 to 4.
Here, the start number of the character string written in
O0033 is set in #143, and a loop is caused using #100 to
associate the program number with soft keys 1 to 5.

Explanation of O0020
00220 N20 #100 = #100 + 6
00230 #100 = #100 + [FIX [#100/6]]
#100/6]]*
]]* 6
A calculation is performed to obtain the cursor position. At
line 220, 6 is added in advance to prevent the cursor position
from becoming negative. The value 6 means that there are
six positions to which the cursor moves.
FIX at line 230 is a function to discard the fractional
remainder from the quotient; the remainder of the division
by 6 is obtained.

Explanation of O0030
00020 #8509 = 33
The character string registration program variable (#8509) is
used to specify the program number including the sequence
number to be specified in G243P (sequence number). Here,
the character string of program number 0033 is used.

00120 X3 Y7 (*352D 3966 2F40 ......)

To use internal codes of characters such as kanji characters
on the display screen, enclose the codes with "(*" and "*)". A
kanji character occupies two horizontal character spaces.

0017
00170 X6 Y17
Y17 Z1 F5.2 (F5.2) D#100
F5.2 specifies the number of numeric data digits when
numeric data is displayed. F5.2 indicates that 5-digit
numeric data including a two-digit fractional part is to be
displayed.

- 278 -
B-63323EN-2/01 10.APPENDIX

EXAMPLE
If 1234.567 is stored in #100, "234.57" is displayed.

Explanation of O0032
00030 N001 G243 X3 Y11 A1 B1 (BLINK)
G243 B1 sets the blink display mode. The characters to be
displayed after this command are all displayed in the blink
display mode. To cancel the blink display mode, specify
G243 B0.

Explanation of O0040
00070 N20 #100 = G00.4 |
The state of G00.4 (emergency stop) is read into common
variable #100.

00180 #1 = #102 + 20
00190 #103 = P#1
The content of the parameter specified by P# is read into
common variable #103. Here, the contents of parameter
Nos. 20, 21, 22, and 23 are read by changing the #102 content
from 0 to 3.
20 Interface number of the input device for the foreground
21 Interface number of the output device for the foreground
22 Interface number of the input device for the background
23 Interface number of the output device for the background

Explanation of O0054
00020 #1 = F03.5
The state of F03.5 (memory mode in progress) is read into
local variable #1.

0007
00070 G240 P-3
The color of lines and characters to be displayed is specified.
In this case, the lines and characters are displayed in reverse
video in yellow.

- 279 -
10.APPENDIX B-63323EN-2/01

10.3 Code Tables

Code table of Japanese 'Katakana'

B1 B2 B3 B4 B5
B6 B7 B8 B9 BA
BB BC BD BE BF
C0 C1 C2 C3 C4
C5 C6 C7 C8 C9
CA CB CC CD CE
CF D0 D1 D2 D3
D4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9 DA DB
DC A6
DD
A7 A8 A9 AA AB
AF
AC AD AE
DE DF A1 A2 A3
A4 A5 A0 B0

- 280 -
B-63323EN-2/01 10.APPENDIX

Code table of Japanese 'Kanji' and 'Hiragana'

2421 2422 3024 3025 3026 3027 3029 302D

302E 3030 3035 3036 3037 3038 3042 3045
3046 3047 3048

2423 2424 304A 304B 304C 304D 304E 304F

3051 3052 3055 3056 3057 3058 3059 305B
305C 305D 305E 305F 3060 3061 3063 3064
3065 3066 3068 3069 306C 3030 3075 3077
3078 307A 307B 3121 3122 3123

2425 2426 3126 3127 3129 312B 3132 3133

3134 313A 313B 313D 313F 3140

2427 2428 3144 3146 3147 3149 314A 314B

314C 3151 3152 3154 3155 3157 3158 315B
315C 315F 3160 3163 3164 3167 3168 3169
316A 316C 316F 3173 3174 3176

2429 242A 3178 317A 317B 317C 317D 317E

3221 3223 3224 3226 322B 322C 322D 322F
3230 3231 3232 3234 3235 3238 3239 323A
323B

- 281 -
10.APPENDIX B-63323EN-2/01

242B 242C 323C 323D 323E 323F 3241 3242

3243 3244 3246 3248 324A 324B 324C 324D
324E 324F 3250 3254 3255 3256 3259 325A
325B 325D 325F 3261 3266 3267 3268 326A
326C 326D 3270 3271 3272 3273 3275 3276
3277 3278 327B 327D 327E 3323 3324 3325
3326 3327 3328 332B 332C 332D 332F 3330
3332 3334 3335 3336 3339 333A 3340 3346
3348 334A 334B 334C 334D 334E 334F 3350
3351 3353 3354 3355 3356 3357 3358 335A
335B 335D 335E 3363 3364 3367 3368 3369
336A 3374 3422 3425 3427 3428 3429 342B
342C 342D 3430 3431 3432 3433 3434 3435
3436 3437 3439 343A 343F 3440 3441 3444
3445 3446 3447 3449 344A 344B 344C 344E
3451 3453 3454 3455 3456 3457 3458 3459
345A 345B 345D 345E 345F 3463 3464 3469
346A

242D 242E 346B 346D 346E 346F 3470 3471

3473 3474 3475 3476 3478 3479 347A 347B
347C 347E 3521 3522 3523 3524 3525 3527
3528 3529 352B 352C 352D 352E 352F 3530
3531 3533 3534 3536 353A 353B 353C 353D
353E 353F 3541 3544 3546 354A 354D 3551
3552 3553 3555 3556 3557 3559 355A 355B
355C 355D 355E 355F 3561 3563 3565 3566
3567 3569 356A 356B 356C 356D 356E 356F
3570 3571 3572 3573 3575 3576 3577 3579
357B 357C 357D 357E 3621 3625 3626 3628
362B 362D 362F 3632 3634 3635 3636 3637
3638 3639 363B 363C 363D 363F 3640 3641
3643 3644 3645 3648 3649 364A 364B 364C
3650 3651 3652 3653 3657 3658 365A 365B
3661 3662 3664

- 282 -
B-63323EN-2/01 10.APPENDIX

242F 2430 3665 3667 3668 366B 366C 366E

3671 3672 3675 3676 3678 3679 367D 367E
3721 3724 3727 372B 372F 3731 3732 3733
3734

2431 2432 3738 3739 373A 373B 373C 373F

3740 3741 3742 3744 3746 3747 3748 3749
374A 374F 3750 3751 3754 3757 3759 375A
375D 375E 3760 3762 3763 3764 3765 3766
3767 3768 3769 376A 376B 376C 376E 376F
3770 3772 3773 3774 3775 3777 3778 3779
377A 377B 377C 377D 3821 3822 3824 3825
3826 3828 3829 382A 382B 382C 382E 3830
3831 3833 3835 3836 3837 3838 3839 383A
383B 383D 3840 3842

2433 2434 3844 3845 3846 3847 384A 384B

384C 384D 384E 3850 3851 3858 385B 385C
385E 385F 3861 3864 3865 3866 386C 386D
386E 3872 3874 3875 3877 3878 3879 387A
387B 387C 387D 387E 3922 3923 3925 3926
3927 3929 392A 392C 392D 392F 3930 3933
3934 3935 3936 3939 393B 393D 393E 393F
3941 3942 3943 3945 3946 3948 394A 394B
394C 394D 394E 3952 3953 3954 3955 3956
3957 3958 3959 395B 395D 395F 3960 3961
3962 3964 3966 3967 396E 396F 3970 3971
3972 3973 3975 3978 397C 397E 3A21 3A22
3A23 3A24 3A27 3A2C 3A2E

2435 2436 3A38 3A39 3A3A 3A3D 3A3F 3A42

3A43 3A44 3A45 3A46 3A47 3A4A 3A4C 3A4D
3A4E 3A4F 3A51 3A52 3A55 3A57 3A59 3A5A
3A5B 3A5C 3A5D 3A5E 3A5F 3A60 3A61 3A62
3A64 3A65 3A69 3A6A 3A6E 3A6F 3A72 3A74
3A76 3A77 3A78 3A79 3A7D 3A7E 3B21 3B22
3B23 3B24 3B25 3B26 3B28 3B2E 3B30 3B31
3B32 3B33 3B35 3B36 3B3A 3B3B 3B3E 3B3F
3B40 3B44

- 283 -
10.APPENDIX B-63323EN-2/01

2437 2438 3B45 3B47 3B48 3B49 3B4B 3B4D

3B4E 3B4F 3B50 3B51 3B52 3B54 3B55 3B56
3B57 3B58 3B59 3B5C 3B5D 3B5E 3B5F 3B60
3B64 3B65 3B66 3B67 3B69 3B6A 3B6B 3B6C
3B6D 3B6E 3B6F 3B71 3B75 3B76 3B77 3B7A
3B7B 3B7D 3B7E 3C21 3C23 3C27 3C28 3C2A
3C2B 3C2D 3C30 3C31 3C34 3C37 3C3A 3C3C
3C3E 3C41 3C42 3C47 3C4A 3C4C 3C4D 3C4E
3C50 3C51 3C52 3C54 3C55 3C56 3C5A 3C5C
3C61 3C63 3C65 3C67 3C68 3C69 3C6A 3C6C
3C6D 3C6F 3C71 3C72 3C73 3C75 3C77 3C78
3C79 3C7B 3C7D 3C7E 3D22 3D24 3D28 3D29
3D2A 3D2C 3D2D 3D2E 3D30 3D31 3D33 3D35
3D38 3D3B 3D3C 3D3D 3D3E 3D40 3D42 3D44
3D45 3D49 3D4B 3D4C 3D4F 3D50 3D51 3D52
3D55 3D56 3D60 3D62 3D63 3D64 3D67 3D68
3D69 3D6A 3D6B 3D6F 3D70 3D71 3D74 3D75
3D76 3D77 3D78 3D3C 3D7D 3D21 3E26 3E27
3E29 3E2D 3E2E 3E2F 3E30 3E32 3E35 3E37
3E38 3E3A 3E3C 3E43 3E44 3E46 3E47 3E48
3E4A 3E4E 3E4F 3E50 3E52 3E57 3E59 3E5A
3E5C 3E5D 3E5E 3E62 3E63 3E65 3E68 3E6A
3E6B 3E6C 3E6D 3E6F 3E70 3E72 3E74 3E75
3E78 3E7B 3E7E 3F22 3F25 3F26 3F27 3F28
3F29 3F2D 3F2E 3F2F 3F30 3F32 3F33 3F34
3F36 3F37 3F39 3F3B 3F3C 3F3D 3F3F 3F40
3F42 3F44 3F46 3F47 3F48 3F49 3F4A 3F4B
3F4C 3F4D 3F4F 3F54 3F58

2439 243A 3F5C 3F5D 3F5E 3F61 3F62 3F64

3F65 3F68 3F6B 3F6C 3F6D 3F74 3F78 3F79
3F7E 4021 4023

- 284 -
B-63323EN-2/01 10.APPENDIX

243B 243C 4024 4025 4027 4029 402A 402C

402D 402E 402F 4030 4031 4032 4035 4036
4038 4039 403A 403B 403C 403D 403E 403F
4040 4041 4044 4045 4047 404A 404E 404F
4050 4051 4052 4053 4055 4056 4057 405A
405C 405E 405F 4061 4062 4063 4064 4065
4068 4069 406A 406B 406C 406D 406E 406F
4070 4072 4074 4075 4076 4077 4078 407B
407E 4121 4125 412A 412D 412F 4130 4131
4132 4133 4134 4136

243D 243E 413A 4143 4146 4147 4148 414A

414B 414F 4150 4152 4155 4158 415B 415C
415D 415E 4160 4161 4163 4168 416A 416B
416D 4170 4175 4176 4177 417B 417C 417D
4221 4222 4223 4224 4225 4226 4227 4228
4229 422B 422C 422D 422E 422F 4230 4232
4233 4234 4236 4237 4238 423A 423B 423C

243F 2440 423E 423F 4240 4242 4244 4245

4246 4247 424E 4250 4251 4253 4254 4255
4256 4257 4258 425A 425E 425F 4260 4262
4265 4266 4267 4268 426A 426C 426E 4270
4272 4273 4275 4277 4279 427A 4231 4323
4325 4326 432A 432B 432F 4331 4332 4334
4335 4336 4338 433A 433B 433C 4342 4344
4346 4347 4348 434A 434B 434C

2441 2442 434D 434E 434F 4351 4353 4356

4357 4359 435A 435B 435C 435D 435E 4361
4363 4365 4366 4367 4368 4369 436A 436B
436C 436D 436E 4372 4373 4379 437A 437B
4422 4423 4425 4426 4427 4428 4429 442B
442E 4431 4432 4434 4436 4437 4439 443A
443B 443E 4440 4441 4442

2443 2444 2445 4446 4449 444B 444C 444D

445E 445F 4460

- 285 -
10.APPENDIX B-63323EN-2/01

2446 2447 4463 4464 446A 446C 446D 446E

4471 4473 4478 4479 447B 4523 4525 4526
4528 4529 452A 452B 452C 4531 4534 4535
4537 4538 4539 453A 453D 453E 4540 4541
4542 4544 4545

2448 2449 4547 4549 454C 4550 4553 4554

4556 4558 4559 455A 455C 455D 455E 455F
4560 4561 4567 456A 456C 4570 4572 4574
4576 4579 457A 457B 457C 457D 457E 4623
4624 4627 4628 4629 462B 462C 462E 462F
4630 4631 4632 4633 4639 463B 463C 463D
4640 4641 4643 4644 4647 4648 4649 464C
464D 464F 465E 465F

244A 4662 4666 4669 466B 466C 466E 4670

4671

244B 4673 4677 4679 467C 467D 467E 4722

4724 4727

244C

244D 472E 472F 4730 4733 4734

244E 473A 473B 473C 473D 473E 4740

244F 2450 2451 4744 4746 4748 4749 474B

474F 4751 4752 4753 4754 4755 4758 4759
475B 475C 475E 4763 4764 476E 476F 4771
4772 4775 4776 477A 477B 477E 4822 4829
482A 482C 482F 4831 4833 4834 4836 483C
483D 483E 483F 4842 4844 4846 4847 4848
4849 484B 484C 484E 484F 4853 4856 4857

2452 2453 2454 485D 4860 4861 4862 4863

4866 4867 4868 4869 486B 486E 486F 4871
4872 4873 4874 4877 4878 4879 487E 4921
4924 4929 492C 492E 4934 4936 4938 4939
493C 493D 493E 4941 4942 4943 494A 494D
494F 4952

- 286 -
B-63323EN-2/01 10.APPENDIX

2455 2456 2457 4954 4955 4957 4958 4959

495B 495C 495D 495F 4961 4962 4963 4964
4965 4969 4970 4971 4974 4975 4977 497A
497B 497C 497D 497E 4A21 4A22 4A23 4A27
4A28 4A29 4A2A 4A2C 4A2E 4A30 4A33 4A34
4A36 4A38 4A39

2458 2459 245A 4A3A 4A3B 4A3C 4A3E 4A3F

4A41 4A42 4A44 4A46 4A47 4A49 4A4A 4A4C
4A50 4A51 4A52 4A54 4A55 4A56 4A58 4A59
4A5B

245B 245C 245D 4A5D 4A61 4A62 4A64 4A67

4A68 4A69 4A6C 4A6D 4A6F 4A71 4A73 4A75
4A78 4A7B 4A7C 4A7D 4B21 4B22 4B25 4B26
4B27 4B2C 4B2D 4B30 4B33 4B34 4B35 4B36
4B38 4B39 4B3A 4B3B 4B3C 4B3D 4B3E 4B40
4B42 4B43 4B44 4B49 4B4C 4B4D 4B50 4B55
4B57 4B5C 4B5D

245E 4B60 4B61 4B62 4B67 4B68 4B6B 4B6C

4B76 4B78 4B7C 4B7E

245F 4C23 4C24 4C25 4C29 4C2E 4C2F 4C31

2460 4C33 4C34 4C35 4C37 4C38

2461 4C3E 4C3F 4C40 4C41 4C42 4C44 4C47

4C48 4C4A 4C4C

2462 4C4F 4C50 4C53 4C55 4C56 4C57 4C5A

4C5B 4C5C 4C61 4C64 4C66 4C67
2463 2464 4C6A 4C6B 4C6E 4C70 4C72 4C73
4C74 4C75 4C76

2465 2466 4C7D 4D21 4D22 4D25 4D26 4D27

4D2D 4D33 4D36 4D37 4D39 4D3B

2467 2468 4D3D 4D3E 4D3F 4D40 4D42 4D44

4D46 4D48 4D49 4D4B 4D4D 4D4E 4D4F 4D51
4D55 4D57 4D59 4D5B 4D5C 4D5E 4D61 4D63

2469 4D66 4D67 4D68 4D6A 4D6B 4D6D 4D6E

4D70 4D71 4D73 4D77

- 287 -
10.APPENDIX B-63323EN-2/01

246A 4D78 4D7D 4E22 4E24 4E25 4E26 4E27

4E28 4E29 4E2C 4E2E 4E31 4E33 4E34 4E38
4E39 4E3A 4E3B 4E3E 4E40 4E41 4E45 4E47
4E49 4E4C 4E4E 4E4F 4E50 4E53 4E57 4E58
4E59

246B 4E5D 4E5E 4E5F 4E60

246C 4E61 4E63 4E64 4E65 4E69 4E6B 4E6C

4E6E 4E71 4E72 4E73 4E74 4E75 4E76 4E78
4E7D 4F22

246D 4F29 4F2B 4F32 4F33 4F37 4F3A 4F3B

4F3F 4F40

246E 246F 4F42 4F43 4F44 4F46 4F47 4F48

4F4D 4F51 4F53

2472

2473

2641 2642 2F40 2F41 2F42 2F43 2F44 2F45

2F46 2F47 2F48 2F49 2F4A 2F4B 2F4C 2F50

2F51 2F52 2F53

- 288 -
B-63323EN-2/01 INDEX

INDEX
Address Functions ................................112
................................ 112 Conversational Macro (Talk Macro)
Function................................
Function ..............................................
.............................................. 40
Alarm information and external alarm
information ........................................
........................................182
........ 182 CONVERSATIONAL MACRO (TALK
MACRO) FUNCTION AND AUXILIARY
APPENDIX ...........................................
...........................................255
........... 255
MACRO FUNCTION .......................... 39
Appendix tables ....................................
....................................147
.... 147
Cumulative operation time and parts
Array-Type Processing and Referencing of count ..................................................
..................................................204
..................204
P-CODE Variables .............................152
............................. 152
Custom Macro Common Variables (#99100
Auxiliary Macro Function
Function.......................
.......................44
.......................44 to #99999) ...........................................
........................................... 66

Axis-Direction-by-Axis-Direction Interlock Custom Macro System Variables (#1000

Function (#8605 to #8608) .................175
................. 175 and Above) ..........................................
.......................................... 67

Calling an Execution Macro ...................13

...................13 Cutting Time and Distance Read and
Preset Functions
Functions................................
................................148
................................148
Cautions ........................................
........................................ 165, 173
Data input control variable (#8502) .....105
.....105
Character string registration program
number specification (#8509) ............101
............ 101 Data transmission/reception waiting
cancellation................................
cancellation ........................................
........................................126
........126
CNC parameter reference
reference.....................
.....................113
..................... 113
DEBUGGING FUNCTION ...................212
...................212
Code Tables
Tables................................
...........................................
...........................................280
........... 280
Details of control codes .........................161
.........................161
Command key input variable (#8501) ..103
.. 103
Details of control codes and control
Commands ........................................
........................................43,
........ 43, 45
variables ............................................
............................................136
............136
Commands that cannot be used in
Diagnosis information
information...........................
...........................205
...........................205
execution macros .................................
.................................35
Differences from the FS15-B ............10,
............ 10, 37
Common Variables (#100 to #199, #200 to
#499, and #500 to #999)
#999).......................
.......................58
.......................58 Direct Setting by Parameter and Key ..219
..219

Compile Parameters .............................238

............................. 238 Displaying and Setting on the Debugger
Screen ................................................
................................................214
................214
Completion codes ..................................
..................................133
.. 133
Displaying and Setting Values in Macro
Consecutive input of cursor and page keys
Variables................................
Variables ............................................
............................................222
............222
...........................................................
...........................................................108
........................... 108

- 289 -
INDEX B-63323EN-2/01

Displaying Execution Macro Call General .... 12, 118, 135, 160, 166, 178, 213
Information................................
Information ........................................
........................................234
........ 234
GENERAL................................
GENERAL ................................................
................................................ 1
Displaying P-CODE Macro Program
Key Input and Data Input/Output .......103
.......103
Numbers ............................................
............................................232
............ 232
Limitations................................
Limitations....................................
.................................... 146, 164
Error messages .....................................
.....................................169
..... 169
Limitations on commands
commands........................
........................ 8
Error No. List .......................................
.......................................256
....... 256
Limitations on Execution Macros .......... 35
Execution and termination ...............40,
............... 40, 44
List of commands ..................................
..................................169
..169
Execution Control Codes
Codes.........................
.........................48
.........................48
Local Variables (#1 to #33)/Array
Execution Control Variables (#8500, #8510,
Variables (#1 to #99)
#99)...........................
........................... 57
and #8600) ...........................................
...........................................50
...........50
Macro call using a G code ...................... 17
Execution cycle .......................................
.......................................46
.......46
Macro call using a T code
code.......................
....................... 21
EXECUTION MACRO FUNCTION .......11
.......11
Macro call using an axis address ........... 23
Extended data input control variable
#8552 .................................................
.................................................106
................. 106 Macro call using an M code ................... 20

Extended P-CODE Variables (#40000 and Macro calls with G codes (Specification of
Above) ..................................................
..................................................63
..................63 Multiple G codes)
codes)................................
................................ 18

FANUC cassette control .......................127

....................... 127 Macro Compiler
Compiler................................
........................................
........................................ 4

Fatal Error ..............................................

..............................................52
..............52 MACRO COMPILER AND MACRO
EXECUTOR ..........................................
.......................................... 3
File Control ...........................................
...........................................166
........... 166
Macro Executor ........................................
........................................ 7
Flowchart ..............................................
..............................................272
.............. 272
MACRO EXECUTOR FUNCTIONS ...... 70
Function for Searching Data Tables for
Control Variables
Variables...............................
...............................208
............................... 208 Macro Program Example (Inputting Data
and Performing Circle Cutting)
Cutting).........
.........261
.........261
Function screen control function (#8530)
...........................................................
...........................................................101
........................... 101 Macro variable input/output functions .121

Functions ..............................................
..............................................119
.............. 119 Macro Variable List ............................... 55

Functions which cannot use execution MACRO VARIABLES ............................ 54

macros................................
macros..................................................
..................................................35
..................35
MDI key image reading function (variables

- 290 -
B-63323EN-2/01 INDEX

#8540 to #8549) .................................

................................. 108 Screen coordinate system ...................... 76

Meanings of macro variables ................262

................ 262 Screen display control codes .................. 79

Modal call (G66 or G66.1) .......................17

.......................17 Screen Display Functions ...................... 76

OPERATION................................
OPERATION .........................................
.........................................221
......... 221 Setting................................
Setting ...................................................
...................................................168
...................168

Optional block skip .................................

.................................35 Setup procedure ....................................
....................................166
....166

PARAMETERS .....................................
.....................................237
..... 237 Simple call (G65)
(G65)................................
....................................
.................................... 16

P-CODE Macro ........................................

........................................ 8 Source programs ...................................
...................................262
...262

P-CODE macro and P-CODE file

file.............
............. 4 Subprogram call (M98) .......................... 27

P-CODE Macro Parameters

Parameters..................
..................253
.................. 253 Subprogram call for a user program
program......
...... 33

P-CODE Variables (#30000 and Above) .60 Subprogram call using a second auxiliary
function code .......................................
....................................... 31
P-CODE workpiece number search ........33
........33
Subprogram call using a specific code ... 32
PMC Address Reading/Writing (G310).
(G310) . 115
Subprogram call using a T code
code.............
............. 30
PMC address reference .........................112
......................... 112
Subprogram call using an M code
code..........
.......... 27
PMC Axis Control .................................
................................. 160
Subprogram call using an M code in the
Program explanation ............................277
............................ 277
specified range ....................................
.................................... 28
Program functions ................................261
................................ 261
Subprogram call using an S code
code...........
........... 29
Reader/Puncher Interface .....................118
..................... 118
System, servo, and PMC series
Reading A/D Conversion Data ..............156
.............. 156 information ........................................
........................................206
........206

Reading the Distance to Go (#5181 to The number of controlled axes and the
#5200 and #100801 to 100824) ..........159
.......... 159 number of servo axes .........................204
.........................204

Referencing and Writing CNC Programs Torque Limit Override Control (#8990 to
...........................................................
...........................................................135
........................... 135 #8993) ................................................
................................................155
................155

Relative Coordinate Read and Preset Window Function (#8996 to #8999) ......178
......178
Functions (#8996 to #8999) ...............150
............... 150

- 291 -
 Revision Record

FANUC Series 15i/150i-MODEL A Macro Compiler/Macro Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-63323EN-2)

01 Sep.,’99

Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

• No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.

• All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.